Patent Publication Number: US-7715643-B2

Title: Image processing apparatus and method, and image pickup apparatus

Description:
TECHNICAL FIELD 
   The present invention relates to an image processing device and method, and an image-taking device, and particularly relates to an image processing device and method, and an image-taking device, which take into consideration difference between signals detected by sensors and the real world. 
   BACKGROUND ART 
   One type of processing for generating images with higher resolution based on input images, is class classification adaptation processing. An example of class classification adaptation processing is processing wherein coefficients used in processing for generating images with higher resolution are generated beforehand, in the spatial direction, and images are generated with higher resolution in the spatial direction based on the generated coefficients. 
     FIG. 1  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a conventional image processing device for generating coefficients used in class classification adaptation processing for generating HD (High Definition) images from SD (Standard Definition) images. 
   Frame memory  11  stores input images, which are HD images, in increments of frames. The frame memory  11  supplies the stored HD images to a weighted averaging unit  12  and a corresponding pixel obtaining unit  16 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  12  performs ¼ weighted averaging on the HD images stored in the frame memory  11 , generates SD images, and supplies the generated SD images to the frame memory  13 . 
   The frame memory  13  stores the SD images supplied from the weighted averaging unit  12  in increments of frames, and supplies the stored SD images to a class classification unit  14  and prediction tap obtaining unit  15 . 
   The class classification unit  14  is configured of a class tap obtaining unit  21  and a waveform classification unit  22 , and performs class classification of pixels of interest which are the pixel of interest in the SD images stored in the frame memory  13 . The class tap obtaining unit  21  obtains a predetermined number of class taps which are pixels of the SD image corresponding to the pixel of interest from the frame memory  13 , and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  22 . 
     FIG. 2  is a diagram explaining the class taps obtained by the class tap obtaining unit  21 . As shown in  FIG. 2 , the class tap obtaining unit  21  obtains eleven class taps at predetermined positions. 
   The waveform classification unit  22  classifies the pixel of interest into one class out of multiple classes, based on the class taps, and supplies a class No. corresponding to the classified class, to the prediction tap obtaining unit  15 . The waveform classification unit  22  classifies the pixel of interest into one class out of 2048 classes, based on the eleven class taps. 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  15  obtains a predetermined number of prediction taps which are pixels of the SD image, corresponding to the classified class from the frame memory  13 , based on the class No., and supplies the obtained prediction taps and class Nos. to a corresponding pixel obtaining unit  16 . 
     FIG. 3  is a diagram explaining prediction taps which the prediction tap obtaining unit  15  obtains. As shown in  FIG. 3 , the prediction tap obtaining unit  15  obtains nine prediction taps at predetermined locations. 
   The corresponding pixel obtaining unit  16  obtains, from the frame memory  11 , pixels of the HD image corresponding to the pixel values to be predicted, based on the prediction taps and the class Nos., and supplies the prediction taps, class Nos., and the pixels of the HD image corresponding to the obtained pixel values to be predicted, to a normal equation generating unit  17 . 
   The normal equation generating unit  17  generates normal equations corresponding to relationships between prediction taps and pixel values to be predicted, corresponding to the classes, based on the prediction taps, class Nos., and the obtained pixel values to be predicted, and supplies the generated normal equations corresponding to the classes, to a coefficient calculating unit  18 . 
   The coefficient calculating unit  18  solves the normal equation supplied from the normal equation generating unit  17 , calculates coefficient sets corresponding to each class, and supplies the calculated coefficient sets to coefficient set memory  19 , along with the class Nos. 
   The coefficient set memory  19  stores the calculated coefficient sets corresponding to the classes, based on the class Nos. 
     FIG. 4  is a diagram explaining an overview of class classification adaptation processing. In class classification adaptation processing, a tutor image which is an HD image is used to generate a corresponding SD image, by ¼ weighted average processing. The generated SD image is called a student image. 
   Next, a coefficient set for generating an HD image from the SD image is generated, based on the tutor image which is the HD image and the student image which is the corresponding SD image. The coefficient set is configured of coefficients for generating an HD image from an SD image, by linear prediction and the like. 
   A quadruple-density image is generated from the coefficients set thus generated and the SD image, by linear prediction and the like. The processing for generating an image or the like with higher density, from a coefficient set and an input image, is also called mapping. 
   SNR comparison, or visual qualitative evaluation is performed, based on the generated quadruple-density image and a corresponding HD image. 
   A coefficient set generated from a particular tutor image and corresponding student image is called a self coefficient set of the particular tutor image and corresponding student image. Mapping using the self coefficient set is called self mapping. A coefficient set generated from multiple other tutor images and corresponding student images is called a cross coefficient set. 
   On the other hand, with images obtained by a video camera taking a foreground subject which moves across a predetermined stationary background, movement blurring occurs in the event that the speed of movement of the object is relatively fast, and mixing of the foreground and background occurs. 
   With conventional class classification adaptation processing, one set of coefficients is generated for all of the foreground, background, and portions where mixing between the foreground and background occurs, by learning processing such as described above, and mapping processing is executed based on the coefficient set. 
   The conventional learning processing for generating coefficients used in the processing for generating HD images from SD images will be described, with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 6 . In Step S 11 , an image processing device judges whether or not there are unprocessed pixels in the student image, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the student image, the flow proceeds to Step S 12 , and pixels of interest are obtained from the student image, in order of raster scan. 
   In Step S 13 , the class tap obtaining unit  21  of the class classification unit  14  obtains a class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest, from the student image stored in the frame memory  13 . In Step S 14 , the waveform classification unit  22  of the class classification unit  14  performs class classification of the pixel of interest, based on the class tap. In Step S 15 , the prediction tap obtaining unit  15  obtains a prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the student image stored in the frame memory  13 , based on the class into which classification has been made. 
   In Step S 16 , the corresponding pixel obtaining unit  16  obtains a pixel corresponding to a pixel value to be predicted, from tutor data stored in the frame memory  11 , based on the class into which classification has been made. 
   In Step S 17 , the normal equation generating unit  17  adds a pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the prediction tap and pixel value to be predicted to the matrix for each class, based on the class into which classification has been made, the flow returns to Step S 11 , and the image processing device repeats judgment regarding whether or not there are unprocessed pixels. The matrixes for each class to which the pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the prediction tap and pixel value to be predicted are added, correspond to the normal equation for calculating coefficients for each class. 
   In the event that judgment is made in Step S 11  that there are no unprocessed pixels in the student image, the flow proceeds to Step S 18 , wherein the normal equation generating unit  17  supplies the matrix for each class wherein a pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the prediction tap and pixel value to be predicted has been set, to the coefficient calculating unit  18 . The coefficient calculating unit  18  solves the matrix for each class wherein a pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the prediction tap and pixel value to be predicted has been set, and calculates a coefficient set for each class. 
   In Step S 19 , the coefficient calculating unit  18  outputs the coefficient for each class that has been calculated, to the coefficient set memory  19 . The coefficient set memory  19  stores a coefficient set for each class, and the processing ends. 
     FIG. 7  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a conventional image processing device for generating HD images from SD images, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   Frame memory  31  stores input images which are SD images, in increments of frames. The frame memory  31  supplies the stored SD images to a mapping unit  32 . 
   The SD images input to the mapping unit  32  are supplied to a class classification unit  41  and a prediction tap obtaining unit  42 . 
   The class classification unit  41  is configured of a class tap obtaining unit  51  and a waveform classification unit  52 , and performs class classification of pixels of interest which are the pixel of interest in the SD images stored in the frame memory  31 . The class tap obtaining unit  51  obtains from the frame memory  31  a predetermined number of class taps corresponding to the pixel of interest, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  52 . 
   The waveform classification unit  52  classifies the pixel of interest into one class out of multiple classes, based on the class taps, and supplies a class No. corresponding to the classified class, to the prediction tap obtaining unit  42 . 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  42  obtains from the input image stored in the frame memory  31  a predetermined number of prediction taps corresponding to the classified class, based on the class No., and supplies the obtained prediction taps and class Nos. to a prediction computation unit  43 . 
   The prediction computation unit  43  obtains coefficient sets corresponding to classes from the coefficient sets stored in coefficient set memory  33 , based on the class No. The prediction computation unit  43  predicts pixel values of predicted images by linear prediction, based on coefficient sets corresponding to classes, and prediction taps. The prediction computation unit  43  supplies the predicted pixel values to frame memory  34 . 
   The frame memory  34  stores-predicted pixel values supplied from the prediction computation unit  43 , and outputs an HD image wherein the predicted pixel values have been set. 
     FIG. 8  is a diagram illustrating the pixel values of the input image, and the pixel values of the output image generated by class classification adaptation processing. In  FIG. 8 , the white squares indicate input signals, and the solid circles indicate output signals. As shown in  FIG. 8 , the image generated by the class classification adaptation processing contains waveforms lost in the bandwidth restriction of the SD image. In this sense, it can be said that processing for generating an image with higher resolution by the class classification adaptation processing creates resolution. 
   The conventional processing for creating images, for generating HD images from SD image with an image processing device which executes processing for creating resolution by class classification adaptation processing, will be described with reference to the flowchart in  FIG. 9 . 
   In Step S 31 , the image processing device judges whether or not there are unprocessed pixels in the input image, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the input image, the flow proceeds to Step S 32 , where the mapping unit  32  obtains a coefficient set stored in the coefficient set memory  33 . In Step S 33 , the image processing device obtains pixels of interest from the input image in raster scan order. 
   In Step S 34 , the class tap obtaining unit  51  of the class classification unit  41  obtains a class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest, from the input image stored in the frame memory  31 . In Step S 35 , the waveform classification unit  52  of the class classification unit  41  performs class classification of the pixel of interest into one class, based on the class tap. 
   In Step S 36 , the prediction tap obtaining unit  42  obtains a prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the input image stored in the frame memory  31 , based on the class into which classification has been made. 
   In Step S 37 , the prediction computation unit  43  obtains a pixel value of a predicted image by linear prediction, based on the coefficient set corresponding to the class into which classification has been made, and the prediction tap. 
   In Step S 38 , the prediction computation unit  43  outputs the predicted pixel value to the frame memory  34 . The frame memory  34  stores the pixel value supplied from the prediction computation unit  43 . The procedures return to Step S 31 , and repeats judgement regarding whether or not there are unprocessed pixels. 
   In the event that judgment is made in Step S 31  that there are no unprocessed pixels in an input image, the flow proceeds to Step S 39 , where the frame memory  34  outputs the stored predicted image wherein predicted values are set, and the processing ends. 
   Also, edge enhancing processing is used for converting the input image into an image with the sense-of-resolution enhanced even further. As with the class classification adaptation processing described above, the same processing is executed for the entire screen with the edge enhancement processing as well. 
   However, in the event that objects move in front of still backgrounds, movement blurring occurs not only due to mixture of the moving object images itself, but also due to mixture of the moving object images and the background images. Conventionally, processing images corresponding to the mixing of the background image and the image of the moving object had not been given thought. 
   DISCLOSURE OF INVENTION 
   The present invention has been made in light of the above, and it is an object thereof to enable processing of images corresponding to the mixing of background images and images of the moving objects. 
   An image processing device according to the present invention comprises: region specifying means for specifying, based on the input image data, one or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, and outputting region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying; separating means for separating the input image data in at least the mixed region into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information; and processing means for individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   The image processing device may further comprise removing means for removing movement blurring of at least one of the foreground object component and the background object component, with the processing means individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component which have been subjected to movement blurring removal. 
   The region specifying means may further specify a covered background region and an uncovered background region, and output the region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying, with the separating means separating the input image data into the foreground object component and the background object component in the covered background region and the uncovered background region. 
   The processing means may generate coefficients used for class classification adaptation processing, for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The processing means may generate output image data for each of the foreground object component and the background object component, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   The processing means may perform edge enhancement for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The image processing device may further comprise: foreground component image generating means for generating a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the foreground region; and background component image generating means for generating a background component image by synthesizing the background object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the background region; with the processing means individually processing the foreground component image and the background component image which are generated. 
   An image processing method according to the present invention comprises: a region specifying step for specifying, based on the input image data, one or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, and outputting region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying; a separating step for separating the input image data in at least the mixed region into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information; and a processing step for individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   The image processing method may further comprise a removing step for removing movement blurring of at least one of the foreground object component and the background object component, with the foreground object component and the background object component which have been subjected to movement blurring removal being individually processed in the processing step. 
   In the region specifying step, a covered background region and an uncovered background region may be further specified, and the region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying output, with the input image data being separated into the foreground object component and the background object component in the covered background region and the uncovered background region in the separating step. 
   In the processing step, coefficients used for class classification adaptation processing may be generated, for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   In the processing step, output image data may be generated for each of the foreground object component and the background object component, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   In the processing step, edge enhancement may be performed for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The image processing method may further comprise: a foreground component image generating step for generating a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the foreground region; and a background component image generating step for generating a background component image by synthesizing the background object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the background region; with the foreground component image and the background component image which are generated, being individually processed in the processing step. 
   A program in a recording medium according to the present invention comprises: a region specifying step for specifying, based on the input image data, one or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, and outputting region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying; a separating step for separating the input image data in at least the mixed region into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information; and a processing step for individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   The program in the recording medium may further comprise a removing step for removing movement blurring of at least one of the foreground object component and the background object component, with the foreground object component and the background object component which have been subjected to movement blurring removal being individually processed in the processing step. 
   In the region specifying step, a covered background region and an uncovered background region may be further specified, and the region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying output, with the input image data being separated into the foreground object component and the background object component in the covered background region and the uncovered background region in the separating step. 
   In the processing step, coefficients used for class classification adaptation processing may be generated, for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   In the processing step, output image data may be generated for each of the foreground object component and the background object component, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   In the processing step, edge enhancement may be performed for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The program in the recording medium may further comprise: a foreground component image generating step for generating a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the foreground region; and a background component image generating step for generating a background component image by synthesizing the background object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the background region; with the foreground component image and the background component image which are generated, being individually processed in the processing step. 
   A program according to the present invention causes a computer to execute: a region specifying step for specifying, based on the input image data, one or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, and outputting region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying; a separating step for separating the input image data in at least the mixed region into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information; and a processing step for individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   The program may further comprise a removing step for removing movement blurring of at least one of the foreground object component and the background object component, with the foreground object component and the background object component which have been subjected to movement blurring removal being individually processed in the processing step. 
   In the region specifying step, a covered background region and an uncovered background region may be further specified, and the region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying output, with the input image data being separated into the foreground object component and the background object component in the covered background region and the uncovered background region in the separating step. 
   In the processing step, coefficients used for class classification adaptation processing may be generated, for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   In the processing step, output image data may be generated for each of the foreground object component and the background object component, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   In the processing step, edge enhancement may be performed for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The program may further comprise: a foreground component image generating step for generating a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the foreground region; and a background component image generating step for generating a background component image by synthesizing the background object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the background region; with the foreground component image and the background component image which are generated, being individually processed in the processing step. 
   An image-taking device according to the present invention comprises: image-taking means for outputting a subject image taken by an image-taking device having a predetermined number of pixels having time-integration effects as taken image data made up of a predetermined number of pieces of pixel data; region specifying means for specifying, based on the taken image data, one or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, and outputting region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying; separating means for separating the taken image data in at least the mixed region into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information; and processing means for individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   The image-taking device may further comprise removing means for removing movement blurring of at least one of the foreground object component and the background object component, with the processing means individually processing the foreground object component and the background object component which have been subjected to movement blurring removal. 
   The region specifying means may further specify a covered background region and an uncovered background region, and output the region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying, with the separating means separating the taken image data into the foreground object component and the background object component in the covered background region and the uncovered background region. 
   The processing means may generate coefficients used for class classification adaptation processing, for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The processing means may generate output image data for each of the foreground object component and the background object component, by class classification adaptation processing. 
   The processing means may perform edge enhancement for each of the foreground object component and the background object component. 
   The image-taking device may further comprise: foreground component image generating means for generating a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the foreground region; and background component image generating means for generating a background component image by synthesizing the background object component separated in the mixed region and the pixel data of the background region, with the processing means individually processing the foreground component image and the background component image which are generated. 
   One or the other of a mixed region made up of a mixture of a foreground object component configuring foreground objects and a background object component configuring background objects, and a non-mixed region made up of one of a foreground region made up of the foreground object component and a background region made up of a background object component configuring the background objects, are specified, region specifying information corresponding to the results of specifying is output, the input image data in at least the mixed region is separated into the foreground object component and the background object component, corresponding to the region specifying information, and the foreground object component and the background object component are individually processed, corresponding to the results of separation. 
   Thus, in the event that a moving object is photographed, for example, images can be processed corresponding to the mixing of background images and moving object images. 

   
     BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
       FIG. 1  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a conventional image processing device. 
       FIG. 2  is a diagram explaining class taps. 
       FIG. 3  is a diagram explaining prediction taps. 
       FIG. 4  is a diagram describing the overview of class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 5  is a diagram explaining conventional coefficient sets. 
       FIG. 6  is a flowchart explaining conventional learning processing. 
       FIG. 7  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a conventional image processing device. 
       FIG. 8  is a diagram illustrating pixel values of an output image generated by pixel values of an input image, and class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 9  is a flowchart explaining conventional processing for creating images. 
       FIG. 10  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an embodiment of an image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 11  is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an image processing device. 
       FIG. 12  is a diagram describing image-taking by a sensor. 
       FIG. 13  is a diagram describing an arrangement of pixels. 
       FIG. 14  is a diagram describing operation of a detecting device. 
       FIG. 15A  is a diagram describing an image obtained by taking an image of an object corresponding to a moving foreground, and an object corresponding to a still background. 
       FIG. 15B  is a diagram describing a model corresponding to an image obtained by taking an image of an object corresponding to a moving foreground, and an object corresponding to a still background. 
       FIG. 16  is a diagram describing background region, foreground region, mixed region, covered background region, and uncovered background region. 
       FIG. 17  is a model diagram which develops, over the time direction, the pixel values of pixels adjacently arrayed in one row, in an image wherein an object corresponding to a still foreground and an object corresponding to a still background are subjected to image-taking. 
       FIG. 18  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 19  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 20  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 21  is a diagram illustrating an example of extracting pixels of the foreground region, background region, and mixed region. 
       FIG. 22  is a diagram illustrating how pixels correspond to a model wherein pixel values are developed over the time direction. 
       FIG. 23  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 24  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 25  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 26  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 27  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 28  is a diagram illustrating the correlation between a divided image, and a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels are developed over the time direction. 
       FIG. 29  is a diagram illustrating an example of a divided image. 
       FIG. 30  is a diagram illustrating an example of a divided image. 
       FIG. 31  is a flowchart explaining the processing of images with the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 32  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 33  is a diagram describing an image wherein an object corresponding to the foreground is moving. 
       FIG. 34  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 35  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 36  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 37  is a diagram describing conditions for region judgment. 
       FIG. 38A  is a diagram illustrating an example of the results of region specification made by the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 38B  is a diagram illustrating an example of the results of region specification made by the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 38C  is a diagram illustrating an example of the results of region specification made by the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 38D  is a diagram illustrating an example of the results of region specification made by the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 39  is a diagram illustrating an example of the results of region specification made by the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 40  is a flowchart explaining processing for region specifying. 
       FIG. 41  is a block diagram illustrating another example of the configuration of the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 42  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 43  is a diagram illustrating an example of a background region image. 
       FIG. 44  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a binary object image extracting unit  302 . 
       FIG. 45A  is a diagram describing calculating of correlation values. 
       FIG. 45B  is a diagram describing calculating of correlation values. 
       FIG. 46A  is a diagram describing calculating of correlation values. 
       FIG. 46B  is a diagram describing calculating of correlation values. 
       FIG. 47  is a diagram illustrating an example of a binary object image. 
       FIG. 48  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a time change detecting unit  303 . 
       FIG. 49  is a diagram describing judgment of a region judgment unit  342 . 
       FIG. 50  is a diagram illustrating an example of judgment made by the time change detecting unit  303 . 
       FIG. 51  is a flowchart describing processing for region specification by the region judgment unit  103 . 
       FIG. 52  is a flowchart for describing the processing for region specification in detail. 
       FIG. 53  is a block diagram illustrating yet another configuration of the region specifying unit  103 . 
       FIG. 54  is a block diagram describing the configuration of a robustification unit  361 . 
       FIG. 55  is a diagram describing movement compensation of a movement compensation unit  381 . 
       FIG. 56  is a diagram describing movement compensation of a movement compensation unit  381 . 
       FIG. 57  is a flowchart describing the processing for region specification. 
       FIG. 58  is a flowchart describing details of processing for robustification. 
       FIG. 59  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . 
       FIG. 60  is a diagram illustrating an example of an ideal mixture ratio α. 
       FIG. 61  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 62  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 63  is a diagram describing approximation using correlation of foreground components. 
       FIG. 64  is a diagram describing the relation between C, N, and P. 
       FIG. 65  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 . 
       FIG. 66  is a diagram illustrating an example of an estimated mixture ratio. 
       FIG. 67  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of a mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . 
       FIG. 68  is a flowchart explaining the processing for calculating mixture ratio. 
       FIG. 69  is a flowchart describing processing for computing an estimated mixture ratio. 
       FIG. 70  is a diagram describing a straight line approximating a mixture ratio α. 
       FIG. 71  is a diagram describing a plane approximating a mixture ratio α. 
       FIG. 72  is a diagram describing how pixels in multiple frames correspond at the time of calculating the mixture ratio α. 
       FIG. 73  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the mixture ratio estimation processing unit  401 . 
       FIG. 74  is a diagram illustrating an example of an estimated mixture ratio. 
       FIG. 75  is a flowchart explaining the processing for calculating mixture ratio. 
       FIG. 76  is a flowchart describing the processing for mixture ratio estimation by way of a model corresponding to a covered background region. 
       FIG. 77  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
       FIG. 78A  is a diagram illustrating an input image, foreground region image, background region image, foreground component image, and background component image. 
       FIG. 78B  is a model diagram corresponding to an input image, foreground region image, background region image, foreground component image, and background component image. 
       FIG. 79  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 80  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 81  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 82  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the separating unit  601 . 
       FIG. 83  is a flowchart describing the processing for separating the foreground and the background. 
       FIG. 84  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a separated image processing unit  106  which generates coefficient sets. 
       FIG. 85  is a diagram explaining the relation between a tutor image and a student image. 
       FIG. 86  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a learning unit  14 . 
       FIG. 87A  is a diagram explaining class classification processing. 
       FIG. 87B  is a diagram explaining class classification processing. 
       FIG. 88A  is a diagram explaining ADRC processing. 
       FIG. 88B  is a diagram explaining ADRC processing. 
       FIG. 89  is a diagram explaining coefficient sets which the separated image processing unit  106  generates. 
       FIG. 90  is a flowchart explaining the learning processing for generating coefficient sets with the separated image processing unit  106 . 
       FIG. 91  is a flowchart for explaining the processing for generating coefficient sets corresponding to the background region. 
       FIG. 92  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the separated image processing unit  106  which generates a higher resolution image in the spatial direction by executing class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 93  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a mapping unit  807 . 
       FIG. 94A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in the mixed region of a tutor image. 
       FIG. 94B  is a diagram illustrating change in pixel values corresponding to the position in the spatial direction of an image in the mixed region of a tutor image. 
       FIG. 95A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in a mixed region, generated by conventional class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 95B  is a diagram illustrating change in the pixel values corresponding to position in the spatial direction of an image in a mixed region, generated by conventional class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 96A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in a mixed region, generated by the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 96B  is a diagram illustrating change in the pixel values corresponding to the position in the spatial direction of a mixed region image, generated by the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 97A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in a foreground region of a tutor image. 
       FIG. 97B  is a diagram illustrating change in pixel values of an image in the foreground region of a tutor image. 
       FIG. 98A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in a foreground region, generated by conventional class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 98B  is a diagram illustrating change in the pixel values of an image in a foreground region, generated by conventional class classification adaptation processing. 
       FIG. 99A  is a diagram illustrating an example of an image in a foreground region, generated by the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 99B  is a diagram illustrating change in the pixel values corresponding to position in the spatial direction of a foreground region image, generated by the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 100  is a flowchart explaining the processing for creating images with the separated image processing unit  106 . 
       FIG. 101  is a flowchart describing processing for predicting images corresponding to the background region. 
       FIG. 102  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the separated image processing unit  106  wherein edge enhancing processing with difference effects is applied for each region. 
       FIG. 103  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of an edge enhancing unit  907 . 
       FIG. 104A  is a diagram describing the processing for edge enhancement. 
       FIG. 104B  is a diagram describing the processing for edge enhancement. 
       FIG. 104C  is a diagram describing the processing for edge enhancement. 
       FIG. 105  is a diagram illustrating filter coefficients. 
       FIG. 106  is a diagram explaining operation of a high-pass filter  921 . 
       FIG. 107  is a diagram illustrating filter coefficients. 
       FIG. 108  is a diagram explaining operation of the high-pass filter  921 . 
       FIG. 109  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the edge enhancing unit  907 . 
       FIG. 110  is a diagram illustrating filter coefficients. 
       FIG. 111  is a diagram explaining operation of a filter  941 . 
       FIG. 112  is a diagram illustrating filter coefficients. 
       FIG. 113  is a diagram explaining operation of the filter  941 . 
       FIG. 114  is a diagram explaining the processing by the separated image processing unit  106 . 
       FIG. 115  is a flowchart explaining the processing of edge enhancement processing with the separated image processing unit  106 . 
       FIG. 116  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the functions of the image processing device. 
       FIG. 117  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a mixture ratio calculating unit  1101 . 
       FIG. 118  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a foreground/background separation unit  1102 . 
       FIG. 119  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the functions of the image processing device. 
       FIG. 120  is a diagram illustrating the correlation between a divided image, and a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels are developed over the time direction. 
       FIG. 121  is a diagram illustrating the correlation between an image wherein movement blurring has been removed, and a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels are developed over the time direction. 
       FIG. 122  is a diagram describing processing of the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 123  is a flowchart explaining the processing of images with the image processing device according to the present invention. 
       FIG. 124  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
       FIG. 125A  is a diagram illustrating an input image, foreground component image, and background component image. 
       FIG. 125B  is a model diagram corresponding to an input image, foreground component image, and background component image. 
       FIG. 126  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 127  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 128  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 129  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a separating unit  2601 . 
       FIG. 130A  is a diagram illustrating an example of a separated foreground component image. 
       FIG. 130B  is a diagram illustrating an example of a separated background component image. 
       FIG. 131  is a flowchart describing the processing for separating the foreground and the background. 
       FIG. 132  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a movement blurring removal unit  2002 . 
       FIG. 133  is a diagram describing increments of processing. 
       FIG. 134  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of foreground component image are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 135  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of foreground component image are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 136  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of foreground component image are developed over the time direction, and periods corresponding to shutter time are divided. 
       FIG. 137  is a flowchart explaining processing for removing movement blurring contained in the foreground component image by the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . 
       FIG. 138  is a diagram illustrating a model of a background component image. 
       FIG. 139  is a diagram illustrating a model of a corrected background component image. 
       FIG. 140  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  which generates coefficient sets. 
       FIG. 141  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a learning unit  3006 . 
       FIG. 142  is a diagram explaining coefficient sets which the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  generates. 
       FIG. 143  is a flowchart explaining the learning processing for generating coefficient sets by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
       FIG. 144  is a flowchart for explaining the processing for generating coefficient sets corresponding to the background component image. 
       FIG. 145  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  which executes class classification adaptation processing and generates a higher resolution image in the spatial direction. 
       FIG. 146  is a diagram illustrating a model of a foreground component image wherein movement blurring has been removed. 
       FIG. 147  is a diagram illustrating a model of a foreground component image wherein movement blurring has been added. 
       FIG. 148  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a mapping unit  3103 . 
       FIG. 149  is a flowchart explaining the processing for creating an image with regard to the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
       FIG. 150  is a flowchart describing processing for predicting images corresponding to the background component image. 
       FIG. 151  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  wherein edge enhancing processing with difference effects is applied for each image. 
       FIG. 152  is a diagram explaining the processing of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
       FIG. 153  is a flowchart explaining the processing of edge enhancement processing with the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
       FIG. 154  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the functions of the image processing device. 
       FIG. 155  is a block diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a foreground/background separation unit  501 . 
   

   BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION 
     FIG. 10  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of an embodiment of the image processing device according to the present invention. A CPU (Central Processing Unit)  71  performs various types of processing following programs stored in ROM (Read Only Memory)  72 , or a storage unit  78 . RAM (Random Access Memory)  73  suitably stores programs for the CPU  71  to execute, data, and so forth. These CPU  71 , ROM  72 , and RAM  73  are mutually connected via a bus  74 . 
   The CPU  71  is also connected to an input/output interface  75  via the bus  74 . The input/output interface  75  is connected to an input unit  76  such as a keyboard, mouse, microphone, or the like, and is connected to an output unit  77  such as a display, speaker, or the like. The CPU  71  performs various types of processing corresponding to instructions input from the input unit  76 . The CPU  71  then outputs images, audio, or the like, which are obtained as a result of processing, to the output unit  77 . 
   The storage unit  78  connected to the input/output interface  75  comprises a hard disk, for example, and stores programs for the CPU  71  to execute and various types of data. A communication unit  79  communicates with external devices via the Internet or other networks. In this case of the example, the communication unit  79  serves as an obtaining unit which obtains output from a sensor. 
   Also, an arrangement may be made wherein programs are obtained via the communication unit  79 , and are stored in the storage unit  78 . 
   A drive  80  connected to the input/output interface  75  drives a magnetic disk  91 , optical disk  92 , magneto-optical disk  93 , semiconductor memory  94 , or the like, in the event that those are mounted thereon, and obtains programs and data stored therein. The obtained programs and data are transmitted to the storage unit  78  and stored therein, as necessary. 
     FIG. 11  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the functions of the image processing device according to the present invention. 
   Note that whether each function of the image processing device is realized by hardware or software does not matter. That is to say, each block diagram in the present Specification may be regarded as not only a hardware block diagram but also as a software function block diagram. 
   Here, the input image input in the image processing device contains movement blurring. 
   The movement blurring means distortion which is included in images corresponding to moving objects, which occurs due to movement of objects which are objects of image-taking in the real world and due to image-taking properties of the sensor. 
   In the present Specification, images corresponding to objects which are objects of image-taking in the real world are called image objects. 
   Input images provided to the image processing device are provided to an object extracting unit  101 , a region specifying unit  103 , a mixture ratio calculating unit  104 , and a foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
   The object extracting unit  101  roughly extracts the image objects corresponding to the foreground object contained in the input image, and supplies the extracted image object to the movement detecting unit  102 . The object extracting unit  101  roughly extracts the image object corresponding to the foreground object, for example, by detecting the outlines of the image object corresponding to the foreground object contained in input image. 
   The object extracting unit  101  roughly extracts the image object corresponding to the background object contained in the input image, and supplies the extracted image object to the movement detecting unit  102 . The object extracting unit  101  roughly extracts the image object corresponding to the background object, by the difference between the input image and the image object corresponding to the extracted foreground object, for example. 
   Also, for example, an arrangement may be made wherein the object extracting unit  101  roughly extracts the image objects corresponding to the foreground objects and the image objects corresponding to the background objects based upon the difference between the background images stored in background memory provided therein and the input images. 
   The movement detecting unit  102  calculates the movement vectors of the image object corresponding to the roughly extracted foreground objects by techniques such as block matching, gradation, phase correlation, pixel recursion, or the like, and supplies the calculated movement vectors and movement vector position information (information for specifying the pixel positions corresponding to the movement vectors) to the region specifying unit  103 . 
   The movement vector output from the movement detecting unit  102  includes information corresponding to a movement amount v. 
   Also, for example, an arrangement may be made wherein the movement detecting unit  102  outputs the movement vector per image object to the movement blurring adjustment unit  106  along with the pixel position information for specifying a pixel of the image object. 
   The movement amount v is a value which represents the change of position of the image corresponding to the moving object in increments of pixel interval. For example, in the event that the object image corresponding to the foreground moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels away in the following frame with a given frame as a reference, the movement amount v of the image of the object corresponding to the foreground is 4. 
   The region specifying unit  103  classifies each pixel of the input image into one of the foreground region, the background region, or the mixed region which consists of the uncovered background region and the covered background region, and supplies the information which indicates which of the foreground region, the background region, or the mixed region which consists of the uncovered background region or the covered background region, each pixel belongs to, (which will be referred to as region information hereafter), to the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  and the foreground/background separation unit  105 . Note that details of the mixed region, uncovered background region, and the covered background region will be described later. 
   The mixture ratio calculating unit  104  calculates the mixture ratio corresponding to the pixels contained in the mixed region (which will be referred to as mixture ratio α hereafter) based upon the input image and the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , and supplies the calculated mixed ratio to the foreground/background separating unit  105 . 
   The mixture ratio α is a value which represents the ratio of the image component corresponding to the background object (which will also be referred to as background component hereafter) with the pixel value as indicated in Expression (3) described below. 
   The foreground/background separation unit  105  separates the image components corresponding to the foreground object (which will be also referred to as the foreground component hereafter) and the background component image which consists of only the background components based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 , and supplies the image in the background region, the image which consists of only the background components in the uncovered background region (which will be referred to as the background component image in the uncovered background region), the image which consists of only the foreground components in the uncovered background region (which will be referred to as the foreground component image in the uncovered background region), the image which consists of only the background components in the covered background region (which will be referred to as the background component image in the covered background region), the image which consists of only the foreground components in the covered background region (which will be referred to as the foreground component image in the covered background region), and the image in the foreground region, to the separated image processing unit  106 . 
   The separated image processing unit  106  performs processing for the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 , respectively. 
   For example, the separated image processing unit  106  generates coefficients which are used in the class classification adaptation processing for generating an even higher resolution image for each of the image in the background region, background component image in the uncovered background region, foreground component image in the uncovered background region, background component image in the covered background region, foreground component image in the covered background region, and image in the foreground region. 
   For example, the separated image processing unit  106  creates an even higher resolution image by applying the class classification adaptation processing for each of the image in the background region, background component image in the uncovered background region, foreground component image in the uncovered background region, background component image in the covered background region, foreground component image in the covered background region, and image in the foreground region. 
   Also, for example, the separated image processing unit  106  applies the processing for edge enhancement with differing degrees by using a different coefficient for each of the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region. 
   The input images supplied to the image processing device will now be described, referring to  FIG. 12  through  FIG. 27 . 
     FIG. 12  is a diagram which describes image-taking with a sensor. The sensor comprises a CCD video camera or the like, for example, including a CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) area sensor which is a solid-state image-taking device. An object  111  corresponding to the foreground in the real world moves between an object  112  corresponding to the background in the real world, and the sensor, for example, from the left side to the right side horizontally in the drawing. 
   The sensor takes images of the object  111  corresponding to the foreground with the object  112  corresponding to the background. The sensor outputs the taken images in increments of one frame. For example, the sensor outputs images of 30 frames per second. In this case, the exposure period of the sensor is 1/30 seconds. The exposure period represents a period from the sensor beginning conversion of input light into electric charges, up to the end of conversion of input light to electric charges. The exposure period will be also referred to as a shutter period hereafter. 
     FIG. 13  is a diagram which describes an arrangement of pixels. In  FIG. 13 , A through I denote individual pixels. These pixels are arranged on a plane corresponding to the image. One detecting element corresponding to one pixel is disposed on the sensor. Upon the sensor taking images, one detecting element outputs pixel values corresponding to one pixel which makes up the image. For example, a position in the X direction of the detecting elements corresponds to a position in the horizontal direction on the image, and a position in the Y direction of the detecting elements corresponds to a position in the vertical direction on the image. 
   As shown in  FIG. 14 , for example, the detecting element of the CCD converts the input light into charges for a period corresponding to the shutter period, and accumulates the converted charges. The quantity of charges is approximately proportional to the strength of the input light and the period during which the light is input. The detecting element adds the charges converted from the input light to the accumulated charges in the period corresponding to the shutter period. That is to say, the detecting element integrates the input light during the period corresponding to the shutter period, and accumulates the amount of charges corresponding to the integrated light. It can also be said that the detecting element has integrating effects with regard to time. 
   The charges accumulated in the detecting element are converted into a voltage value by a circuit not shown in the drawings, which is further converted to pixel values such as digital data or the like, and is output. Accordingly, individual pixel values output from a sensor have values projected in one-dimensional space, which is from a result wherein a given portion having a spatial extension of the object corresponding to the foreground or the background, is integrated for the shutter period. 
   The image processing device extracts valid information buried in output signals due to such accumulation operations of the sensor, such as the mixture ratio α, for example. 
     FIG. 15A  and  FIG. 15B  are diagrams which describe the image which is obtained by taking image of the object corresponding to the moving foreground and the object corresponding to the still background.  FIG. 15A  illustrates the image which is obtained by taking image of the object corresponding to the foreground with movement and the object corresponding to the still background. With the example shown in  FIG. 15A , the object corresponding to the foreground moves from the left to the right horizontally in the drawing. 
     FIG. 15B  is a model diagram wherein pixel values corresponding to one line of the image shown in  FIG. 15A  develop over the time direction. The horizontal direction in  FIG. 15B  corresponds to the spatial direction X in  FIG. 15A . 
   The pixel values of pixels in the background regions are made up of only the background components, i.e., the image components corresponding to the background objects. The pixel values of pixels in the foreground regions are made up of only the foreground components, i.e., the image components corresponding to the foreground objects. 
   The pixel values of pixels in mixed regions are made up of the background components and the foreground components. Since the pixel values in the mixed region consists of the background components and the foreground components, the mixed region can also be said to be a distortion region. The mixed regions are further classified into covered background regions and uncovered background regions. 
   The covered background region is a mixed region at a position corresponding to a leading portion in the progress direction of the foreground object with regard to the foreground region, and accordingly is a region wherein the background components are covered by the foreground corresponding to elapsing of time. 
   Conversely, the uncovered background region is a mixed region at a position corresponding to a trailing portion in the progress direction of the foreground object with regard to the foreground region, and accordingly is a region wherein the background components emerge corresponding to elapsing of time. 
   As described above, images including the foreground region, background region, covered background region, or uncovered background region, are input as input images to the region specifying unit  103 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 , and the foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
     FIG. 16  is a diagram which describes the background region, foreground region, mixed region, covered background region, and uncovered background region, as described above. In the event of corresponding to the images shown in  FIG. 15A , the background region is the still portion, the foreground region is the moving portion, the covered background region of the mixed region is the portion which changes from the background to the foreground, and the uncovered background region of the mixed region is the portion which changes from the foreground to the background. 
     FIG. 17  is a model diagram wherein pixel values of the pixels arrayed adjacently in one line in the image that has been taken of the objects corresponding to the still foregrounds and the objects corresponding to the still backgrounds, develop over the time direction. For example, pixels arrayed in one line in a screen may be selected, as pixels adjacently arrayed in one line. 
   The pixel values F 01  through F 04  shown in  FIG. 17  are pixel values of pixels corresponding to the still foreground object. The pixel values B 01  through B 04  shown in  FIG. 17  are pixel values of pixels corresponding to the still background object. 
   The vertical direction in  FIG. 17  represents elapsing of time from the top to the bottom in the drawing. The position of the upper side of the rectangle in  FIG. 17  corresponds to the time at which the sensor begins conversion of the input light into charges, and the position of the lower side of the rectangle in  FIG. 17  corresponds to the time at which the sensor ends the conversion of the input light into charges. That is to say, the distance from the upper side to the lower side of the rectangle in  FIG. 17  corresponds to the shutter period. 
   An arrangement wherein the shutter period equals the frame interval will now be described below, by way of an example. 
   The horizontal direction in  FIG. 17  corresponds to the spatial direction X as described in  FIG. 15A . More particularly, shown by way of an example in  FIG. 17 , the distance from the left side of the rectangle denoted by “F 01 ” to the right side of the rectangle denoted by “B 04 ” in  FIG. 17 , is eight times long as the pixel pitch, that is to say, corresponds to the interval of eight continuous pixels. 
   In the event that the foreground objects and the background objects keep still, the light input to the sensor is not altered during the period corresponding to the shutter period. 
   Now, the period corresponding to the shutter period is divided into two or more periods of equal length. For example, in the event that the virtual dividing number is 4, the model diagram shown in  FIG. 17  can be represented by the model shown in  FIG. 18 . The virtual dividing number is set corresponding to the movement amount v or the like of the object corresponding to the foreground within the shutter period. For example, corresponding to the movement amount v of 4, the virtual dividing number is 4, and the period corresponding to the shutter period is divided into 4 periods. 
   The uppermost row in the drawing corresponds to the first of the divided periods from the shutter being opened. The second row from the top in the drawing corresponds to the second of the divided periods from the shutter being opened. The third row from the top in the drawing corresponds to the third of the divided periods from the shutter being opened. The fourth row from the top in the drawing corresponds to the fourth of the divided periods from the shutter being opened. 
   The divided shutter period corresponding to the movement amount v is also referred to as a shutter period/v hereafter. 
   In the event that the object corresponding to the foreground keeps still, the foreground component F 01 /v equals the value in which the pixel value F 01  is divided by the virtual dividing number, since the light input to the sensor is not altered. Similarly, in the event that the object corresponding to the foreground keeps still, the foreground component F 02 /v equals the value of the pixel value F 02  being divided by the virtual dividing number, the foreground component F 03 /v equals the value of the pixel value F 03  being divided by the virtual dividing number, and the foreground component F 04 /v equals the value of the pixel value F 04  being divided by the virtual dividing number. 
   In the event that the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component B 01 /v equals the value of the pixel value B 01  being divided by the virtual dividing number, since the light input to the sensor is not altered. Similarly, in the event that the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component B 02 /v equals the value of the pixel value B 02  being divided by the virtual dividing number, B 03 /v equals the value of the pixel value B 03  being divided by the virtual dividing number, and B 04 /v equals the value of the pixel value B 04  being divided by the virtual dividing number. 
   That is to say, in the event that the object corresponding to the foreground keeps still, the foreground component F 01 /v corresponding to the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening, the foreground component F 01 /v corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening, the foreground component F 01 /v corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening, and the foreground component F 01 /v corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening, are the same value, since the light corresponding to the foreground object which is input to the sensor is not altered during the period corresponding to the shutter period. F 02 /v through F 04 /v have the same relationship as F 01 /v. 
   In the event that the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component B 01 /v corresponding to the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening, the background components B 01 /v corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening, the background components B 01 /v corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening, and the background components B 01 /v corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening, are the same value, since the light corresponding to the background object which is input to the sensor is not altered during the period corresponding to the shutter period. B 02 /v through B 04 /v have the same relationship. 
   A case will now be described wherein the object corresponding to the foreground moves while the object corresponding to the background keeps still. 
     FIG. 19  is a model diagram wherein pixel values of the pixels on one line including the covered background region develop over the time direction in the event that the object corresponding to the foreground moves towards the right side in the drawing. In  FIG. 19 , the movement amount v of the foreground is 4. Since one frame is a short period, an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body, and moves at a constant velocity. 
   In  FIG. 19 , the object image corresponding to the foreground moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right in the following frame, with a given frame as a reference. 
   In  FIG. 19 , the left-most pixel through the fourth pixel from the left, belong to the foreground region. In  FIG. 19 , the fifth through the seventh pixels from the left belong to the covered background region of the mixed region. In  FIG. 19 , the right-most pixel belongs to the background region. 
   Since the object corresponding to the foreground moves so as to hide the object corresponding to the background with elapsing of time, the components contained in the pixel values of the pixels which belong to the covered background region change from the background components to the foreground components at a certain point of the period corresponding to the shutter period. 
   For example, the pixel value M shown with a heavy frame in  FIG. 19 , is represented by Expression (1).
 
 M=B 02 /v+B 02 /v+F 07 /v+F 06 /v   (1)
 
   For example, since the fifth pixel from the left includes a background component corresponding to one shutter period/v and foreground components corresponding to the three shutter period/vs, the mixture ratio α of the fifth pixel from the left is ¼. Since the sixth pixel from the left contains background components corresponding to the two shutter period/vs and foreground components corresponding to the two shutter period/vs, the mixture ratio α of the sixth pixel from the left is ½. Since the seventh pixel from the left includes background components corresponding to the three shutter period/vs and a foreground component corresponding to the one shutter period/v, the mixture ratio α of the seventh pixel from the left is ¾. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and the foreground image moves at a constant velocity so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right in the following frame, the foreground component F 07 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 . Similarly, the foreground component F 07 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , and the foreground component corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and that the foreground image moves at a constant velocity so as to be displayed at a point four pixels to the right in the following frame, the foreground component F 06 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 . Similarly, the foreground component F 06 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , and the foreground component corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and the foreground image moves at a constant velocity so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right in the following frame, the foreground component F 05 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 . Similarly, the foreground component F 05 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , and the foreground component corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and the foreground image moves at a constant velocity so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right in the following frame, the foreground component F 04 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in  FIG. 19 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 . Similarly, the foreground component F 04 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , and the foreground component corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 19 , respectively. 
   As described above, the foreground region corresponding to the moving object includes movement blurring, so this can be said to be a distorted region. 
     FIG. 20  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of the pixels on one line including the uncovered background region develop over the time direction in the event that the foreground moves toward the right side in the drawing. In  FIG. 20 , the movement amount v of the foreground is 4. Since one frame is a short time, an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body, and moves at a constant velocity. In  FIG. 20 , the object image corresponding to the foreground moves to the right side by four pixels in the following frame with a given frame as a reference. 
   In  FIG. 20 , the left-most pixel through the fourth pixel from the left, belong to the background region. In  FIG. 20 , the fifth through the seventh pixels from the left belong to the mixed region of the uncovered background. In  FIG. 20 , the right-most pixel belongs to the foreground region. 
   Since the object corresponding to the foreground which has hidden the object corresponding to the background moves so as to be removed from the front of the object corresponding to the background with elapsing of time, the components included in the pixel values of the pixels which belong to the uncovered background region change from the foreground components to the background components at a certain point in the period corresponding to the shutter period. 
   For example, the pixel value M′ indicated with a heavy frame in  FIG. 20 , is represented by Expression (2).
 
 M′=F 02/ v+F 01/ v+B 26/ v+B 26/ v   (2)
 
   For example, since the fifth pixel from the left includes the background components corresponding to the three shutter period/vs, and the foreground component corresponding to the one shutter period/v, the mixture ratio α of the fifth pixel from the left is ¾. Since the sixth pixel from the left includes the background components corresponding to the two shutter period/vs and the foreground components corresponding to the two shutter period/vs, the mixture ratio α of the sixth pixel from the left is ½. Since the seventh pixel from the left includes the background component corresponding to the one shutter period/v and the foreground components corresponding to the three shutter period/vs, the mixture ratio α of the seventh pixel from the left is ¼. 
   Further generalizing Expression (1) and Expression (2), the pixel value M is represented by Expression (3). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 M 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     α 
                     · 
                     B 
                   
                   + 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       i 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         F 
                         i 
                       
                       / 
                       v 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 3 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, α denotes the mixture ratio. B denotes the pixel value of the background, and Fi/v denotes the foreground component. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the movement amount v is 4, for example, the foreground component F 01 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20  equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 . Similarly, F 01 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 , and the foreground component corresponding to the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the virtual dividing number is 4, the foreground component F 02 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 . Similarly, the foreground component F 02 /v equals the foreground component corresponding to the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 . 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is an rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and movement amount v is 4, the foreground component F 03 /v of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 , for example, equals the foreground component corresponding to the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 20 . 
   While a description has been made in the description of  FIG. 18  through  FIG. 20  wherein the virtual dividing number is 4, the virtual dividing number corresponds to the movement amount v. The movement amount v generally corresponds to the movement velocity of the object corresponding to the foreground. For example, in the event that the object corresponding to the foreground moves so as to be displayed at a position-four pixels to the right in the following frame with a given frame as a reference, the movement amount v is 4. The virtual dividing number is 4 corresponding to the movement amount v. Similarly, for example, in the event that the object corresponding to the foreground moves so as to be displayed at a position six pixels to the left in the following frame with a given frame as a reference, the movement amount v is 6, and the virtual dividing number is 6. 
     FIG. 21  and  FIG. 22  illustrate the relationship between the foreground region, the background region, and the mixed region which consists of the covered background region or the uncovered background region, and the foreground components and the background components, corresponding to the divided shutter period. 
     FIG. 21  illustrates an example wherein the pixels of the foreground region, the background region, and the mixed region, are extracted from the image including the foreground corresponding to the object which moves in front of the still background. The reference character A shown in  FIG. 21  denotes an object which moves in front of the still background. In the example shown in  FIG. 21 , the object corresponding to the foreground denoted by the reference character A moves horizontally with regard to the screen. 
   The frame #n+1 is the frame following the frame #n, and the frame #n+2 is the frame following the frame #n+1. 
     FIG. 22  illustrates a model wherein the pixels of the foreground region, the background region, and the mixed region are extracted from one of frame #n through frame #n+2, and the pixel values of the extracted pixels are developed over the time direction, with the movement amount v at 4. 
   Since the object corresponding to the foreground moves, the pixel values of the foreground region consist of four different foreground components corresponding to the period of shutter period/v. For example, the left-most pixel of the pixels of the foreground region shown in  FIG. 22  consists of F 01 /v, F 02 /v, F 03 /v, and F 04 /v. That is to say, the pixels of the foreground region include movement blurring. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the light corresponding to the background input to the sensor is not altered during the period corresponding to the shutter period. In this case, the pixel values of the background region do not contain movement blurring. 
   The pixel value of the pixel which belongs to the mixed region made up of the covered background region or the uncovered background region consists of the foreground components and the background components. 
   Next, a model will be described wherein, in the event that the image corresponding to the object moves, the pixel values of the pixels which are arrayed adjacently in a single line on multiple frames, and at the same position in the frames, develop over the time direction. For example, in the event that the image corresponding to the object moves horizontally on the screen, the pixels arrayed in a single line can be selected as pixels arrayed adjacently in a single line. 
     FIG. 23  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels arrayed adjacently in a single line on three frames of images which are taken of the object corresponding to the still background, and are at the same position in the frames, develop over the time direction. The frame #n is the frame following the frame #n−1, and the frame #n+1 is the frame following the frame #n. Other frames are denoted in the same way. 
   The pixel values of the B 01  through B 12  shown in  FIG. 23  are the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the object of the still background. Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the pixel values of the corresponding pixels do not change in the frame #n−1 through the frame #n+1. For example, the pixels in the frame #n and the pixels in the frame #n+1 at the position corresponding to the pixel having a pixel value B 05  in the frame #n−1, have a pixel value B 05 , respectively. 
     FIG. 24  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels arrayed adjacently in a single line on three frames of images taken of the object corresponding to the foreground which moves to the right side in the drawing with the object corresponding to the still background, and at the same position in the frames, develop over the time direction. The models shown in  FIG. 24  includes the covered background region. 
   Since an assumption may be made in  FIG. 24  that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the foreground image moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the foreground movement amount v is 4, and the virtual dividing number is 4. 
   For example, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel of the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  is F 12 /v, the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 12 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , are F 12 /v. 
   The foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v, and the foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 11 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v. 
   The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  is F 10 /v, and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 10 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  is F 09 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  is B 01 /v. The background components of the first and second shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  are B 02 /v. The background components of the first through third shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  are B 03 /v. 
   In the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24 , the left-most pixel belongs to the foreground region, and the second through fourth pixels from the left belong to the mixed region of the covered background region. 
   The fifth through twelfth pixels from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 24  belong to the background region, and the pixel values thereof are B 04  through B 11 , respectively. 
   The first through fifth pixels from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  belong to the foreground region. The foreground component of the shutter period/v in the foreground region in the frame #n, is one of F 05 /v through F 12 /v. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the foreground image moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  is F 12 /v, the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 12 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , are F 12 /v. 
   The foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v, and the foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 11 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v. 
   The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  is F 10 /v, and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 10 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  is F 09 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  is B 05 /v. The background components of the first and second shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  are B 06 /v. The background components of the first through third shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  are B 07 /v. 
   In the frame #n in  FIG. 24 , the sixth through eighth pixels from the left belong to the mixed region of the covered background region. 
   The ninth through twelfth pixels from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 24  belong to the background region, and the pixel values are B 08  through B 11 , respectively. 
   The first through ninth pixels from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  belong to the foreground region. The foreground component of the shutter period/v in the foreground region in the frame #n+1 is one of F 01 /v through F 12 /v. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the foreground image moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  is F 12 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 12 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the twelfth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24 , are F 12 /v. 
   The foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v, and the foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 11 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is F 11 /v. 
   The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  is F 10 /v, and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in  FIG. 24  is also F 10 /v. The foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  is F 09 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  is B 09 /v. The background components of the first and second shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  are B 10 /v. The background components of the first through third shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the twelfth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24  are B 11 /v. 
   In the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 24 , the tenth through twelfth pixels from the left side correspond to the mixed region which is the covered background region. 
     FIG. 25  is a model diagram wherein the foreground components are extracted from the pixel values illustrated in  FIG. 24 . 
     FIG. 26  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of the pixels adjacently arrayed in a row in three frames of the images which are taken of the foreground corresponding to the object which moves to the right side in the drawing with the still background, and are at the same position in the frames, develop over the time direction. In  FIG. 26 , the model diagram includes the uncovered background region. 
   In  FIG. 26 , an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body, and moves at a constant velocity. Since the object corresponding to the foreground moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the movement amount v is 4. 
   For example, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  is F 13 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 13 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fourth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , are F 13 /v. 
   The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  is F 14 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 14 /v. The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is F 15 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background component of the second through fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the left-most pixel in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  is B 25 /v. The background components of the third and fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  are B 26 /v. The background component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  is B 27 /v. 
   In the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26 , the left-most pixel through the third pixel belong to a mixed region of the uncovered background region. 
   The fourth through twelfth pixels from the left in the frame #n−1 in  FIG. 26  belong to the foreground region. The foreground component in the frame is one of F 13 /v through F 24 /v. 
   The left-most pixel through the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  belong to the background region, and the pixel values are B 25  through B 28 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the foreground image moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  is F 13 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 13 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , are F 13 /v. 
   The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  is F 14 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 14 /v. The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eighth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is F 15 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background components of the second through fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the fifth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  are B 29 /v. The background components of the third and fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the sixth pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  are B 30 /v. The background component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  is B 31 /v. 
   In the frame #n in  FIG. 26 , the fifth through seventh pixels from the left belong to the mixed region of the uncovered background region. 
   The eighth through twelfth pixels from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 26  belong to the foreground region. The value corresponding to the period of the shutter period/v in the foreground region in the frame #n is one of F 13 /v through F 20 /v. 
   The left-most pixel through the eighth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26 , belong to the background region, and the pixel values thereof are B 25  through B 32 , respectively. 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body and moves at a constant velocity, and the foreground image moves so as to be displayed at a position four pixels to the right side in the following frame, the foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  is F 13 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 13 /v. The foreground component of the third shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , and the foreground component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the twelfth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26 , are F 13 /v. 
   The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  is F 14 /v, and the foreground component of the second shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is also F 14 /v. The foreground component of the first shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the twelfth pixel from the left in  FIG. 26  is F 15 /v. 
   Since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the background components of the second through fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the ninth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  are B 33 /v. The background components of the third and fourth shutter period/vs from the shutter opening of the tenth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  are B 34 /v. The background component of the fourth shutter period/v from the shutter opening of the eleventh pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  is B 35 /v. 
   In the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26 , the ninth through eleventh pixels from the left belong to the mixed region of the uncovered background region. 
   The twelfth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1 in  FIG. 26  belongs to the foreground region. The foreground component of the shutter period/v in the foreground region in the frame #n+1 is one of F 13 /v through F 16 /v. 
     FIG. 27  is a model diagram of the image wherein the foreground components are extracted from the pixel values shown in  FIG. 26 . 
     FIG. 28  is a diagram which illustrates how the input image divided into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, correspond to a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels develop over the time direction. 
   As shown in  FIG. 28 , the input image is classified into the foreground region, background region, covered background region, and uncovered background region, by the region specifying unit  103 . The input image is separated into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, by the foreground/background separation unit  105  based upon the specified regions, i.e., the foreground region, background region, covered background region, and uncovered background region, and the mixture ratio α detected by the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . 
   The separated images, i.e., the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, are processed, respectively. 
     FIG. 29  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image divided into the foreground region, the background region, and the mixed region. The region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, background region, and mixed region, of the input image. The image processing device can divide the input image into the image of the foreground region, image of the background region, and image of the mixed region, based upon the region information indicating the foreground region, background region, and mixed region. 
   As shown in  FIG. 30 , the foreground/background separation unit  105  separates the image of the mixed region into the foreground component image and the background component image based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . 
     FIG. 31  illustrates the flowchart which describes the processing for an image with the image processing device according to the present invention. 
   In Step S 101 , the region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, background region, covered background region, and uncovered background region of the input image, based upon the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102  and the input image. Details of the processing for region specifying will be described later. 
   In Step S 102 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  calculates the mixture ratio α based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the input image. Details of the processing of the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  calculating the mixture ratio α will be described later. 
   In Step S 103 , the foreground/background separation unit  105  separates the input image into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . Details of the processing for separation of an image by the foreground/background separation unit  105  will be described later. 
   In Step S 104 , the separated image processing unit  106  performs image processing for each of the separated images, i.e., the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, and the processing ends. Details of the image processing performed by the separated image processing unit  106  will be described later. 
   As described above, the image processing device according to the present invention separates the input image into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, and performs the image processing for each of the separated images, i.e., the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, which are separated. 
     FIG. 32  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the region specifying unit  103 . The region specifying unit  103 , of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 32 , does not use the movement vectors. Frame memory  201  stores the input images in increments of one frame. In the event that the object of the processing is the frame #n, the frame memory  201  stores the frame #n−2 which is two frames previous from the frame #n, the frame #n−1 which is one frame previous from the frame #n, the frame #n, the frame #n+1 which is one frame following the frame #n, and the frame #n+2 which is two frames following the frame #n. 
   A still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  reads out the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+2, which is at the same position as the position of the pixel on the image, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1, which is at the same position as the position of the pixel on the image, which is the object of specifying the region of the frame #n, from the frame memory  201 , and calculates the absolute value of the difference between the read out pixel values. The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  judges whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value in the frame #n+2 and the pixel value in the frame #n+1 is greater than the predetermined threshold value Th, and in the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference is greater than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  supplies the still/motion judgment, indicating motion, to a region judgment unit  203 - 1 . In the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+2 and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1 is equal to or less than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  supplies the still/motion judgment, indicating “still”, to the region judgment unit  203 - 1 . 
   A still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  reads out the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1, which is at the same position as the position of the pixel on the image, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, and the pixel value of pixel which is the object in the frame #n from the frame memory  201 , and calculates the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values. The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  judges whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value in the frame #n+1 and the pixel value in the frame #n is greater than the predetermined threshold value Th, and in the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values is greater than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment indicating motion is supplied to the region judgment unit  203 - 1  and the region judgment unit  203 - 2 . In the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1 and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n is equal to or smaller than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  supplies the still/motion judgment, indicating “still”, to the region judgment unit  203 - 1  and the region judgment unit  203 - 2 . 
   The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  reads out the pixel value of the pixel, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1, which is at the same position as the position on the image of the pixel, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, from the frame memory  201 , and calculates the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values. The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  judges whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value in the frame #n and the pixel value in the frame #n−1 is greater than the predetermined value Th, and in the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values is greater than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment indicating motion is supplied to the region judgment unit  203 - 2  and the region judgment unit  203 - 3 . In the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1 is equal to or smaller than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  supplies the still/motion judgment indicating “still” to the region judgment unit  203 - 2  and the region judgment unit  203 - 3 . 
   The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  reads out the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position as the position of the pixel on the image, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−2 at the same position as the position of the pixel on the image, which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n, from the frame memory  201 , and calculates the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values. The still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  judges whether or not the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value in the frame #n−1 and the pixel value in the frame #n−2 is greater than the predetermined threshold value Th, and in the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values is greater than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment indicating motion is supplied to the region judgment unit  203 - 3 . In the event that judgment is made that the absolute value of the difference between the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1 and the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−2 is equal to or smaller than the threshold value Th, the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  supplies the still/motion judgment indicating “still” to the region judgment unit  203 - 3 . 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  indicates “still”, and the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates motion, the region judgment unit  203 - 1  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n belongs to the uncovered background region, and sets the uncovered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region, to “1”, which indicates that the pixel belongs to the uncovered background region. 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  indicates motion, or the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates still, the region judgment unit  203 - 1  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n does not belong to the uncovered background region, and sets the uncovered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “0”, which indicates that the pixel does not belong to the uncovered background region. 
   The region judgment unit  203 - 1  supplies the uncovered background region judgment flag which has been set to “1” or “0”, as described above, to the judgment flag storing memory  204 . 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates “still”, and the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates “still”, the region judgment unit  203 - 2  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n belongs to the still region, and sets the still region judgment flag corresponding to the pixel judged in the region, to “1”, which indicates that the pixel belongs to the still region. 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates motion, or the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates motion, the region judgment unit  203 - 2  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n does not belong to the still region, and sets the still region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region, to “0”, which indicates that the pixel does not belong to the still region. 
   The region judgment unit  203 - 2  supplies the still region judgment flag which has been set to “1” or “0” as described above, to judgment flag storing frame memory  204 . 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates motion, and the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates motion, the region judgment unit  203 - 2  judges the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n belongs to the moving region, and sets the moving region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region, to “1”, which indicates that the pixel belongs to the moving region. 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  indicates “still”, or the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates “still”, the region judgment unit  203 - 2  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n does not belong to the moving region, and sets the moving region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region, to “0”, which indicates that the pixel does not belong to the moving region. 
   The region judgment unit  203 - 2  supplies the moving region judgment flag which has been set to “1” or “0”, to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 . 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates motion, and the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  indicates “still”, the region judgment unit  203 - 3  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n belongs to the covered background region, and sets the covered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “1”, which indicates that the pixel belongs to the covered background region. 
   In the event that the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  indicates “still”, or the still/motion judgment supplied from the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  indicates motion, the region judgment unit  203 - 3  judges that the pixel which is the object of specifying the region in the frame #n does not belong to the covered background region, and sets the covered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “0”, which indicates that the pixel does not belong to the covered background region. 
   The region judgment unit  203 - 3  supplies the covered background region judgment flag which has been set to “1” or “0” as described above, to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 . 
   The judgment flag storing frame memory  204  stores the uncovered background region judgment flag supplied from the region judgment unit  203 - 1 , the still region judgment flag supplied from the region judgment unit  203 - 2 , the moving region judgment flag supplied from the region judgment unit  203 - 2 , and the covered background region judgment flag supplied from the region judgment unit  203 - 3 . 
   The judgment flag storing frame memory  204  supplies the uncovered background region judgment flag, the still region judgment flag, the moving region judgment flag, and the covered background region judgment flag, which are stored therein, to a synthesizing unit  205 . The synthesizing unit  205  generates the region information which indicates which of the uncovered background region, the still region, the moving region, or the covered background region, each pixel belongs to, and supplies the information to judgment flag storing frame memory  206 , based upon the uncovered background region judgment flag, the still region judgment flag, the moving region judgment flag, and the covered background region judgment flag, which are supplied from the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 . 
   The judgment flag storing frame memory  206  stores the region information supplied from the synthesizing unit  205 , and also outputs the stored region information. 
   An example for processing performed by the region specifying unit  103  will now be described with reference to  FIG. 33  through  FIG. 37 . 
   In the event that the object corresponding to the foreground moves, the position of the image corresponding to the object on the screen changes with each frame. As shown in  FIG. 33 , in the frame #n, the image corresponding to the object which is at the position indicated by Yn(x,y) is at the position Yn+1(x,y) in the following frame #n+1. 
     FIG. 34  is a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels of the image corresponding to the foreground object, which are adjacently arrayed in sequence in a image movement direction, develop over the time direction. For example, in the event that the image moving direction corresponding to the foreground object is horizontal to the screen, the model diagram in  FIG. 34  indicates the model wherein the pixel values of adjacent pixels in one line develop over the time direction. 
   In  FIG. 34 , the line in the frame #n is the same as the line in the frame #n+1. 
   The foreground components corresponding to the object, which are included in the second pixel through thirteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n, are included in the sixth through seventeenth pixels from the left in the frame #n+1. 
   In the frame #n, the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the eleventh through thirteenth pixels from the left, and the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region are the second through fourth pixels from the left. In the frame #n+1, the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left, and the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region are sixth through eighth pixels from the left. 
   With the example shown in  FIG. 34 , the movement amount v is 4, since the foreground components included in the frame #n move by four pixels in the frame #n+1. The virtual dividing number is 4, corresponding to the movement value v. 
   Next, a description will be made regarding the change of the pixel values of the pixels belonging to the mixed region in the frames previous to and following the frame of interest. 
   In the frame #n wherein the background keeps still and the movement amount v of the foreground is 4, shown in  FIG. 35 , the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left. Since the movement amount v is 4, in the previous frame #n−1, the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left include only the background components, and belong to the background region. Also, in the frame # n−2 which is one further before, the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left contain only the background components, and belong to the background region. 
   Note that since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the pixel value of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 do not change from the pixel value of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−2. Similarly, the pixel value of the sixteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 do not change from the pixel value of the sixteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−2, and the pixel values of the seventeenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1 do not change from the pixel value of the seventeenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−2. 
   That is to say, the pixels of the frame #n−1 and frame #n−2 corresponding to the pixels belonging to the covered background region in the frame #n consists of only the background components, and the pixel values do not change, and accordingly the absolute value of the difference therebetween is approximately zero. Accordingly, judgment is made that the still/motion judgment for the pixels of the frame #n−1 and the frame #n−2 corresponding to the pixels belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n is still by the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4 . 
   Since the pixels belonging to the covered background region in the frame #n contain the foreground components, the pixel values are different from the case wherein the pixel values in the frame #n−1 consist of only the background components. Accordingly, judgment is made that the still/motion judgment for the pixels belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n and the pixels in the frame #n−1 corresponding thereto is motion by the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3 . 
   As described above, the region judgment unit  203 - 3  judges that the corresponding pixels belong to the covered background region in the event that the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  supplies the results of the still/motion judgment which indicates motion, and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  supplies the results of the still/motion judgment which indicates “still”. 
   In the frame #n wherein the background keeps still and the foreground movement amount v is 4 as shown in  FIG. 36 , the pixels included in the uncovered background region are the second through fourth pixels from the left. Since the movement amount v is 4, in the frame #n+1 following the frame #n, the second through fourth pixels from the left include only the background components, and belong to the background region. Also, in the frame #n+2 further one frame following the frame #n+1, the second through fourth pixels from the left contain only the background components, and belong to the background region. 
   Note that since the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the pixel values of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n+2 does not change from the pixel value of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n+1. Similarly, the pixel value of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n+2 does not change from the pixel value of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n+1, and the pixel value of the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n+2 does not change from the pixel value of the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n+1. 
   That is to say, the pixels of the frame #n+1 and the frame #n+2, corresponding to the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region in the frame #n, consist of only the background components, so the pixel values thereof do not change, and accordingly the absolute value of the difference thereof is approximately zero. Accordingly, judgment is made that the still/motion judgment for the pixels of the frame #n+1 and the frame #n+2 corresponding to the pixels belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n is “still” by the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1 . 
   Since the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region in the frame #n contain the foreground components, the pixel values are different from the case wherein the pixels consists of only the background components in the frame #n+1. Accordingly, judgment is made that the still/motion judgment for the pixels belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n and the pixels corresponding thereto in the frame #n+1 is motion by the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2 . 
   As described above, the region judgment unit  203 - 1  judges that the corresponding pixels belong to the uncovered background region in the event that the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  supplies the results of the still/motion judgment which indicates motion, and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  supplies the still/motion judgment which indicates “still”. 
     FIG. 37  is a diagram which illustrates judgment conditions of the region specifying unit  103  in the frame #n. In the event that judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n−2 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, and the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, are “still”, and judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, and the pixel in the frame #n are motion, the region specifying unit  103  judges that the pixel which is the object of judgment of the frame #n belongs to the covered background region. 
   In the event that judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, and the pixel in the frame #n, are judged to be “still”, and judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n and the pixel in the frame #n+1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, are judged to be “still”, the region specifying unit  103  judges that the pixel which is the object of judgment of the frame #n belongs to the still region. 
   In the event that judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, and the pixel in the frame #n, are judged to be motion, and judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel in the frame #n+1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, are judged to be motion, the region specifying unit  103  judges that the pixel which is the object of judgment of the frame #n belongs to the movement region. 
   In the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel in the frame #n+1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, are motion, and judgment is made that the pixel in the frame #n+1 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, and the pixel in the frame #n+2 at the same position as the position of the pixel which is the object of judgment on the image in the frame #n, are judged to be “still”, the region specifying unit  103  judges that the pixel which is the object of judgment of the frame #n belongs to the uncovered background region. 
     FIG. 38A  through  FIG. 38D  are diagrams which illustrate examples of results of the region specifying unit  103  specifying the region. In  FIG. 38A , the pixels which have been judged to belong to the covered background region are displayed in white. In  FIG. 38B , the pixels which have been judged to belong to the uncovered background region are displayed in white. 
   In  FIG. 38C , the pixels which have been judged to belong to the movement region are displayed in white. In  FIG. 38D , the pixels which have been judged to belong to the still region are displayed in white. 
     FIG. 39  is a diagram which illustrates the region information as an image, indicating the mixed region of the region information which the judgment flag storing frame memory  206  outputs. In  FIG. 39 , the pixels which have been judged to belong to the covered background region or the uncovered background region, i.e., the pixels judged to belong to the mixed region, are displayed in white. The region information indicating the mixed region, which the judgment flag storing frame memory  206  outputs, indicates the mixed region and the portions which have texture within the foreground region and are surrounded by portions which have no texture. 
   Next, referring to the flowchart in  FIG. 40 , the processing for region specifying by the region specifying unit  103  will be described. In Step S 201 , the frame memory  201  obtains the images of the frame #n−2 through the frame #n+2, including the frame #n which is the object of judgment. 
   In Step S 202 , the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position keep still, and in the event of judgment of “still”, the flow proceeds to Step S 203 , and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position keep still. 
   In Step S 203 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are “still”, the flow proceeds to Step S 204 , and the region judgment unit  203 - 2  sets the still region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “1” which indicates the pixel belongs to the still region. The region judgment unit  203 - 2  supplies the still region judgment flag to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 , and the procedure proceeds to Step S 205 . 
   In Step S 202 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are motion, or in Step S 203 , judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are motion, the pixel of the frame #n does not belong to the still region, and accordingly the processing in Step S 204  is skipped, and the procedure proceeds to Step S 205 . 
   In Step S 205 , the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are in motion, and in the event of judgment of motion, the flow proceeds to Step S 206 , and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are in motion. 
   In Step S 206 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are in motion, the flow proceeds to Step S 207 , the region judgment unit  203 - 2  set the movement region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “1” which indicates that the pixel belongs to the movement region. The region judgment unit  203 - 2  supplies the movement region judgment flag to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 , and the procedure proceeds to Step S 208 . 
   In Step S 205 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are “still”, or in Step S 206 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are “still”, since the pixel of the frame #n does not belong to the movement region, the processing in Step S 207  is skipped, and the procedure proceeds to Step S 208 . 
   In Step S 208 , the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 4  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n−2 and the pixel of the frame #n−1 at the same position keeps still, and in the event of judgment of “still”, the flow proceeds to Step S 209 , and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 3  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are in motion. 
   In Step S 209 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are in motion, the flow proceeds to Step S 210 , and the region judgment unit  203 - 3  sets the covered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “1” which indicates that the pixel belongs to the covered background region. The region judgment unit  203 - 3  supplies the covered background region judgment flag to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 , and the procedure proceeds to Step S 211 . 
   In Step S 208 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n−2 and the pixel of the frame #n−1 at the same position are in motion, or in Step S 209 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n−1 and the pixel of the frame #n at the same position are “still”, the pixel of the frame #n does not belong to the covered background region, so the processing in Step S 210  is skipped, and the procedure proceeds to Step S 211 . 
   In Step S 211 , the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 2  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are in motion, and in the event of judgment of motion, the flow proceeds to Step S 212 , and the still/motion judgment unit  202 - 1  judges whether or not the pixel of the frame #n+1 and the pixel of the frame #n+2 at the same position keep still. 
   In Step S 212 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n+1 and the pixel of the frame #n+2 at the same position are “still”, the flow proceeds to Step S 213 , and the region judgment unit  203 - 1  sets the uncovered background region judgment flag corresponding to the judged pixel in the region to “1” which indicates that the pixel belongs to the uncovered background region. The region judgment unit  203 - 1  supplies the uncovered background region judgment flag to the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 , and the procedure proceeds to Step S 214 . 
   In Step S 211 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n and the pixel of the frame #n+1 at the same position are “still”, or in Step  212 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of the frame #n+1 and the pixel of the frame #n+2 at the same position are in motion, since the pixel of the frame #n does not belong to the uncovered background region, the processing in Step S 213  is skipped, and the procedure proceeds to Step S 214 . 
   In Step S 214 , the region specifying unit  103  judges whether or not all the pixels in the frame #n are region-specified, and in the event that judgment is made that not all pixels are region-specified, the procedure returns to Step S 202 , and repeats the processing of specifying the region for other pixels. 
   In Step S 214 , in the event that judgment is made that all the pixels in the frame #n are region-specified, the flow proceeds to Step S 215 , and the synthesizing unit  205  generates the region information which indicates the mixed region based upon the uncovered background region judgment flag and the covered background region judgment flag, which are stored in the judgment flag storing frame memory  204 , and furthermore generates the region information which indicates which of the uncovered background region, the still region, the movement region, or the covered background region, each pixel belongs to, sets the generated region information for the judgment flag storing frame memory  206 , and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the region specifying unit  103  can generate region information which indicates which of the movement region, the still region, the uncovered background region, or the covered background region, each pixel contained in the frame belongs to. 
   Note that an arrangement may be made wherein the region specifying unit  103  generates the region information corresponding to the mixed region and the region information made up of flags which indicates which of the movement region, the still region, or the mixed region, each of pixels contained in the frame belongs to, by applying the logical sum to the region information corresponding to the uncovered background region and the covered background region. 
   In the event that the object corresponding to the foreground has texture, the region specifying unit  103  can specify the movement region more accurately. 
   The region specifying unit  103  can output the region information indicating the movement region as the region information indicating the foreground region, or output the region information indicating the still region as the region information indicating the background region. 
   While description has been made wherein the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the processing of specifying the region described above can be applied even if the image corresponding to the background region contains motion. For example, in the event that the image corresponding to the background region moves in a constant manner, the region specifying unit  103  shifts the entire image corresponding to the movement, and performs processing in the same manner as with the case wherein the object corresponding to the background keeps still. Also, in the event that the image corresponding to the background region contains a different motion at each local position, the region specifying unit  103  selects the pixel corresponding to the motion, and performs the above-described processing. 
     FIG. 41  is a block diagram which illustrates another example of the structure of the region specifying unit  103 . The region specifying unit  103  shown in  FIG. 41  does not use movement vectors. A background image generating unit  301  generates the background image corresponding to the input image, and supplies the generated background image to a binary object image extracting unit  302 . The background image generating unit  301  extracts, for example, the image object corresponding to the background object contained in the input image, and generates the background image. 
   An example of a model diagram is illustrated in  FIG. 42  wherein the pixel values of the pixels arrayed in sequence adjacently in a movement direction of the image corresponding to the foreground object develop over the time direction. For example, the model diagram in  FIG. 42  illustrates a model wherein, in the event that the movement direction of the image corresponding to the foreground object is horizontal to the screen, the pixel values of the adjacent pixels in one line develop over the time direction. 
   In  FIG. 42 , the line in the frame #n is the same as the line in the frame #n−1 and the line in the frame #n+1. 
   In the frame #n, the foreground components corresponding to the object, which are contained in the sixth pixel through seventeenth pixel from the left, are contained in the second through thirteenth pixels from the left in the frame #n−1, and are contained in the tenth through twenty first pixels from the left in the frame #n+1. 
   In the frame #n−1, the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the eleventh through thirteenth pixels from the left, and the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region are the second through fourth pixels from the left. In the frame #n, the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the fifteenth through the seventeenth pixels from the left, and the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region are the sixth through eighth pixels from the left. In the frame #n+1, the pixels belonging to the covered background region are the nineteenth through twenty first pixels from the left, and the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region are the tenth through twelfth pixels from the left. 
   In the frame #n−1, the pixels belonging to the background region are the first from the left, and the fourteenth through twenty first pixels from the left. In the frame #n, the pixels belonging to the background region are the first through fifth pixels from the left, and the eighteenth through twenty first pixels from the left. In the frame #n+1, the pixels belonging to the background region are the first through ninth pixels from the left. 
   An example of the background image corresponding to the example shown in  FIG. 42 , which is generated by the background image generating unit  301 , is illustrated in  FIG. 43 . The background image is made up of the pixels corresponding to the background object, and does not contain image components corresponding to the foreground object. 
   The binary object image extracting unit  302  generates a binary object image based upon the correlation between the background image and the input image, and supplies the generated binary object image to a time change detecting unit  303 . 
     FIG. 44  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the binary object image extracting unit  302 . A correlation value computing unit  321  computes the correlation between the background image supplied from the background image generating unit  301  and the input image, generates a correlation value, and supplies the generated correlation value to a threshold value processing unit  322 . 
   The correlation value computing unit  321  applies Expression (4) to a block 3×3 wherein X 4  is centered in the background image as shown in  FIG. 45A , and a block 3×3 wherein Y 4  corresponding to the block in the background image is centered in the input image as shown in  FIG. 45B , and calculates a correlation value corresponding to the Y 4 , for example. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   Correlation 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   Value 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                       8 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ( 
                         
                           
                             X 
                             i 
                           
                           - 
                           
                             X 
                             _ 
                           
                         
                         ) 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         
                           ∑ 
                           
                             i 
                             = 
                             0 
                           
                           8 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             
                               Y 
                               i 
                             
                             - 
                             
                               Y 
                               _ 
                             
                           
                           ) 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   
                     
                       
                         ∑ 
                         
                           i 
                           = 
                           0 
                         
                         8 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               
                                 X 
                                 i 
                               
                               - 
                               
                                 X 
                                 _ 
                               
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           2 
                         
                         · 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               i 
                               = 
                               0 
                             
                             8 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   Y 
                                   i 
                                 
                                 - 
                                 
                                   Y 
                                   _ 
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             2 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 4 
                 ) 
               
             
           
           
             
               
                 
                   X 
                   _ 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                       8 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       X 
                       i 
                     
                   
                   9 
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 5 
                 ) 
               
             
           
           
             
               
                 
                   Y 
                   _ 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                       8 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       Y 
                       i 
                     
                   
                   9 
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 6 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   The correlation value computing unit  321  supplies the correlation value calculated corresponding to each pixel as described above to the threshold value processing unit  322 . 
   Also, an arrangement may be made wherein the correlation value computing unit  321 , for example, applies Expression (7) to the block 3×3 in the background image wherein X 4  is centered as shown in  FIG. 46A , and the block 3×3 in the input image wherein Y 4  is centered corresponding to the block in the background image as shown in  FIG. 46B , and calculates the sum of absolute value of difference corresponding to Y 4 . 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   Sum 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   of 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   Absolute 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   Value 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   of 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   Difference 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       i 
                       = 
                       0 
                     
                     8 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                      
                     
                       ( 
                       
                         
                           X 
                           i 
                         
                         - 
                         
                           Y 
                           i 
                         
                       
                       ) 
                     
                      
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 7 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   The correlation value computing unit  321  supplies the difference absolute value calculated as described above as the correlation value to the threshold value processing unit  322 . 
   The threshold value processing unit  322  compares the pixel value of the correlation image with the threshold value th 0 , and in the event that the correlation value is equal to or less than the threshold value th 0 , the threshold value processing unit  322  sets the pixel value of the binary object image to 1, and in the event that the correlation value is greater than the threshold value th 0 , the threshold value processing unit  322  sets the pixel value of the binary object image to 0, and outputs the binary object image of which each pixel value has been set to 0 or 1. The threshold value processing unit  322  may store the threshold value th 0  beforehand, and may use the threshold value th 0  which is input externally. 
     FIG. 47  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the binary object image corresponding to the model of the input image shown in  FIG. 42 . In the binary object image, a pixel value of a pixel having a high correlation with the background image is set to 0. 
     FIG. 48  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the time change detecting unit  303 . Frame memory  341  stores the binary object images of the frame #n−1, frame #n, and frame #n+1, supplied from the binary object image extracting unit  302  at the point of judgment of the region for the pixel of the frame #n. 
   A region judgment unit  342  judges the region for each pixel of the frame #n based upon the binary object images of the frame #n−1, frame #n, and frame #n+1, which are stored in the frame memory  341 , generates the region information, and outputs the generated region information. 
     FIG. 49  is a diagram which describes the judgment made by the region judgment unit  342 . In the event that the pixel of interest of the binary object image of the frame #n is 0, the region judgment unit  342  judges the pixel of interest of the frame #n to belong to the background region. 
   In the event that the pixel of interest of the binary object image of the frame #n is 1, the corresponding pixel of the binary object image of the frame #n−1 is 1, and the corresponding pixel of the binary object image of the frame #n+1 is 1, the region judgment unit  342  judges the pixel of interest of the frame #n to belong to the foreground region. 
   In the event that the pixel of interest of the binary object image of the frame #n is 1, and the corresponding pixel of the binary object image of the frame #n−1 is 0, the region judgment unit  342  judges the pixel of interest of the frame #n to belong to the covered background region. 
   In the event that the pixel of interest of the binary object image of the frame #n is 1, and the corresponding pixel of the binary object image of the frame #n+1 is 0, the region judgment unit  342  judges the pixel of interest of the frame #n to belong to the uncovered background region. 
     FIG. 50  is a diagram which illustrates an example wherein the time change detecting unit  303  judges the binary object image corresponding to the model of the input image shown in  FIG. 42 . The time change detecting unit  303  judges the first through fifth pixels from the left of the frame #n to belong to the background region since the corresponding pixels of the binary object image of the frame #n are 0. 
   The time change detecting unit  303  judges the sixth through ninth pixels from the left to belong to the uncovered background region since the pixels of the binary object image of the frame #n are 1, and the corresponding pixels of the frame #n+1 are 0. 
   The time change detecting unit  303  judges the tenth through thirteenth pixels from the left to belong to the foreground region since the pixels of the binary object image of the frame #n are 1, the corresponding pixels of the frame #n−1 are 1, and the corresponding pixels of the frame #n+1 are 1. 
   The time change detecting unit  303  judges the fourteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left to belong to the covered background region since the pixels of the binary object image of the frame #n are 1, and the corresponding pixels of the frame #n−1 are 0. 
   The time change detecting unit  303  judges the eighteenth through twenty first pixels from the left to belong to the background region since the corresponding pixels of the binary object image of the frame #n are 0. 
   The processing of specifying the region by the region judgment unit  103  will be now described, referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 51 . In Step S 301 , the background image generating unit  301  of the region judgment unit  103 , for example, generates the background image by extracting the image object corresponding to the background object contained in the input image based upon the input image, and supplies the generated background image to the binary object image extracting unit  302 . 
   In Step S 302 , the binary object image extracting unit  302  computes the correlation value between the input image and the background image supplied from the background image generating unit  301  by the computation described referring to  FIG. 45 , for example. In Step S 303 , the binary object image extracting unit  302  computes the binary object image from the correlation value and the threshold value th 0  by comparing the correlation value with the threshold value th 0 , for example. 
   In Step S 304 , the time change detecting unit  303  performs processing of region judgment, and the processing ends. 
   The processing of the region judgment corresponding to Step S 304  will be described in detail, referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 52 . In Step S 321 , the region judgment unit  342  of the time change detecting unit  303  judges whether or not the pixel of interest in the frame #n stored in the frame memory  341  is 0, and in the event that the judgment is made that the pixel of the interest in the frame #n is 0, the flow proceeds to Step S 322 , makes settings to the effect that the pixel of interest in the frame #n belongs to the background region, and the processing ends. 
   In Step S 321 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of interest in the frame #n is 1, the flow proceeds to Step S 323 , and the region judgment unit  342  of the time change detecting unit  303  judges whether or not the pixel of interest in the frame #n stored in the frame memory  341  is 1, and the corresponding pixel in the frame #n−1 is 0, and in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of interest in the frame #n is 1, and the corresponding pixel in the frame #n−1 is 0, the flow proceeds to Step S 324 , makes settings to the effect that the pixel of interest in the frame #n belongs to the covered background region, and the processing ends. 
   In Step S 323 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of interest in the frame #n is 0, or the corresponding pixel in the frame #n−1 is 1, the flow proceeds to Step S 325 , and the region judgment unit  342  of the time change detecting unit  303  judges whether or not the pixel of interest in the frame #n stored in the frame memory  341  is 1, and the corresponding pixel in the frame #n+1 is 0, and in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of interest in the frame #n is 1, and the corresponding pixel in the frame #n+1 is 0, the flow proceeds to Step S 326 , makes settings to the effect that the pixel of interest in the frame #n belongs to the uncovered background region, and the processing ends. 
   In Step S 325 , in the event that judgment is made that the pixel of interest in the frame #n is 0, or the corresponding pixel in the frame #n+1 is 1, the flow proceeds to Step S 327 , and the region judgment unit  342  of the time change detecting unit  303  sets the pixel of interest in the frame #n for the foreground region, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the region specifying unit  103  can specify which of the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, or the uncovered background region, the pixel of the input image belongs to, and can generate region information corresponding to the specified results. 
     FIG. 53  is a block diagram which illustrates another configuration of the region specifying unit  103 . The region specifying unit  103  shown in  FIG. 53  uses the movement vector and the position information thereof, which are supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 . Portions the same as those shown in  FIG. 41  are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   A robustification unit  361  generates a robustified binary object image based upon N frames of the binary object image supplied from the binary object image extracting unit  302 , and outputs to the time change detecting unit  303 . 
     FIG. 54  is a block diagram which describes the configuration of the robustification unit  361 . A movement compensation unit  381  compensates for the movement of the binary object image of N frames based upon the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 , and outputs the binary object image which has been subjected to compensation of movement to a switch  382 . 
   The movement compensation of the movement compensation unit  381  will be described with reference to examples shown in  FIG. 55  and  FIG. 56 . For example, when judging the region in the frame #n, in the event that there is input of the binary object images of the frame #n−1, the frame #n, and the frame #n+1, shown by way of the example in  FIG. 55 , the movement compensation unit  381  compensates for movement of the binary object image of the frame #n−1 and the binary object image of the frame #n+1, based upon the movement vector supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 , and supplies the binary object image which has been subjected to compensation of movement to the switch  382 , as indicated in the example shown in  FIG. 56 . 
   The switch  382  outputs the binary object image which has been subjected to movement compensation of the first frame, to the frame memory  383 - 1 , and outputs the binary object image which has been subjected to movement compensation of the second frame to the frame memory  383 - 2 . Similarly, the switch  382  outputs each of the binary object images of which the third through N−1&#39;th frames have been subjected to compensation for the movement to each of frame memory  383 - 3  through frame memory  383 -(N−1), respectively, and outputs the binary object image of which the N&#39;th frame has been subjected to movement compensation to frame memory  383 -N. 
   The frame memory  383 - 1  stores the binary object image of which the first frame has been subjected to movement compensation, and outputs the stored binary object image to a weighting addition unit  384 - 1 . The frame memory  383 - 2  stores the binary object image of which the second frame has been subjected to movement compensation, and outputs the stored binary object image to a weighting addition unit  384 - 2 . 
   Similarly, each of the frame memory  383 - 3  through the frame memory  383 -(N−1) stores each of the binary object images of which one of the third frame through N−1&#39;th frame has been subjected to compensation for the movement, and outputs the stored binary object image to each of the weighing addition unit  384 - 3  through the weighing addition unit  384 -(N−1). The frame memory  383 -N stores the binary object image of which N&#39;th frame has been subjected to compensation for the movement, and outputs the stored binary object image to a weighing addition unit  384 -N. 
   The weighing addition unit  384 - 1  multiplies the pixel value of the binary object image of which the first frame has been subjected to compensation for the movement supplied from the frame memory  383 - 1  by the predetermined weight w 1 , and supplies to an accumulation unit  385 . The weighing addition unit  384 - 2  multiplies the pixel value of the binary object image of the second frame which has been subjected to movement compensation supplied from the frame memory  383 - 2  by the predetermined weight w 2 , and supplies to an accumulation unit  385 . 
   Similarly, each of the weighting addition unit  384 - 3  through the weighing addition unit  384 -(N−1) multiplies the pixel value of the binary object image of one of the third through N−1&#39;th frames, which has been subjected to movement compensation supplied from one of the frame memory  383 - 3  through the frame memory  383 -(N−1) by one of the predetermined weights w 3  through w(N−1), and supplies to the accumulation unit  385 . A weighing addition unit  384 -N multiplies the pixel value of the binary object image of the N&#39;th frame supplied from the frame memory  383 -N which has been subjected to movement compensation by the predetermined weight wN, and supplies to the accumulation unit  385 . 
   The accumulation unit  385  accumulates the pixel value corresponding to the binary object image, wherein each of the first through N&#39;th frames which has been subjected to movement compensation is multiplied by one of the predetermined weights w 1  through wN, and generates the binary object image by comparing the accumulated pixel value with the predetermined threshold value th 0 . 
   As described above, the robustification unit  361  generates the robustified binary object image from the N frames of binary object images, and supplies to the time change detecting unit  303 , so the region specifying unit  103  of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 53  can specify the region more accurately as compared with the case shown in  FIG. 41 , even if the input image contains noise. 
   The processing for specifying the region of the region specifying unit  103  of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 53  will now be described, referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 57 . The processing in Step S 341  through Step S 343  is the same as Step S 301  through Step S 303  described in the flowchart shown in  FIG. 51 , respectively, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   In Step S 344 , the robustification unit  361  performs processing for robustification. 
   In Step S 345 , the time change detecting unit  303  performs processing for specifying the region, and the processing ends. Details of the processing in Step S 345  are the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 52 , so description thereof will be omitted. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 58 , processing of robustification corresponding to the processing in Step S 344  shown in  FIG. 57  will now be described in detail. In Step S 361 , the movement compensation unit  381  performs movement compensation processing of the input binary object image based upon the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 . In Step S 362 , one of the frame memory  383 - 1  through the frame memory  383 -N stores the binary object image, which has been subjected to movement compensation, supplied via the switch  382 . 
   In Step S 363 , the robustification unit  361  judges whether or not N binary object images are stored, and in the event that judgment is made that N binary object images have not been stored, the flow returns to Step S 361 , and the robustification unit  363  repeats processing of compensation for movement of the binary object image, and processing of storing the binary object image. 
   In Step S 363 , in the event that judgment is made that N binary object images stored, the flow proceeds to Step S 364 , and each of the weighting addition units  384 - 1  through  384 -N multiplies each of N binary object images, by one of the weights w 1  through wN for weighting. 
   In Step S 365 , the accumulation unit  385  accumulates the N weighted binary object images. 
   In Step S 366 , the accumulation unit  385  generates the binary object image from the accumulated image, by comparing with the predetermined threshold value th 1 , for example, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the region specifying unit  103 , of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 53 , can generate region information based upon the robustified binary object image. 
   As described above, the region specifying unit  103  can generate the region information which indicates which of the movement region, the still region, the uncovered background region, or the covered background region, each of the pixels contained in the frame belongs to. 
     FIG. 59  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . An estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  calculates estimated mixture ratio for each pixel by computation corresponding to a model of a covered background region based upon the input image, and supplies the calculated estimated mixture ratio to a mixture ratio determination unit  403 . 
   An estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  calculates estimated mixture ratio for each pixel by computation corresponding to a model of the uncovered background region based upon the input image, and supplies the calculated estimated mixture ratio to the mixture ratio determination unit  403 . 
   Since an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground moves at a constant velocity within a shutter period, the mixture ratio α of a pixel belonging to the mixed region has a nature such as described below. That is to say, the mixture ratio α changes linearly corresponding to the change of the position of the pixel. Taking the change of the pixel position to be one-dimensional, the change of the mixture ratio α may be represented by a straight line, and taking the change of the pixel position to be two-dimensional, the change of the mixture ratio α may be represented by a plane. 
   Note that the period of one frame is short, an assumption may be made that the object corresponding to the foreground is a rigid body, and moves at a constant velocity. 
   In this case, the inclination of the mixture ratio α is inversely proportionate to the movement amount v of the foreground within the shutter period. 
   An example of an ideal mixture ratio α is shown in  FIG. 60 . The inclination  1  of an ideal mixture ratio α in the mixed region may be represented by the reciprocal of the movement amount v. 
   As shown in  FIG. 60 , an ideal mixture ratio α has a value of 1 in the background region, and has a value of 0 in the foreground region, and has a value which exceeds 0 and is less than 1 in the mixed region. 
   With the example shown in  FIG. 61 , the pixel value C 06  of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n may be represented in Expression (8), using the pixel value P 06  of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n−1. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         C 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         06 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             06 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             06 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           P 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             06 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           P 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             06 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               2 
                               / 
                               v 
                             
                             · 
                             P 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           06 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               i 
                               = 
                               1 
                             
                             2 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             
                               F 
                               i 
                             
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 8 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (8), the pixel value C 06  is represented as the pixel value M of the pixel in the mixed region, and the pixel value P 06  is represented as the pixel value B of the pixel in the background region. That is to say, the pixel value M of the pixel in the mixed region and the pixel value B of the pixel in the background region may be represented as in Expression (9) and Expression (10), respectively.
 
M=C06  (9)
 
B=P06  (10)
 
   In Expression (8), 2/v corresponds to the mixture ratio α. Since the movement amount v is 4, the mixture ratio α of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n is 0.5. 
   As described above, Expression (3) indicating the mixture ratio α may be rewritten as with Expression (11) by reckoning the pixel value C in the frame #n of interest to be a pixel value in the mixed region, and reckoning the pixel value P in the frame #n−1 previous to the frame #n to be a pixel value of the background region.
 
 C=α·P+f   (11)
 
   In Expression (11), f is the sum of the foreground components contained in the pixel of interest, Σ i Fi/v. The variables included in Expression (11) are two, i.e., the mixture ratio α and the sum of the foreground components f. 
   In the same way,  FIG. 62  illustrates a model wherein the pixel values wherein the movement amount v is 4, and virtual dividing number is 4 in the uncovered background region, develop over the time direction. 
   Expression (3) indicating the mixture ratio α may be represented as in Expression (12) with the pixel value C in the frame #n of interest as a pixel value in the mixed region, and with the pixel value N in the frame #n+1 following the frame #n as a pixel value in the background region, in the same manner as the representation in the covered background region described above, in the uncovered background region.
 
 C=α·N+f   (12)
 
   Note that while description has been made with an assumption that the background object keeps still, Expression (8) through Expression (12) may be applied by using the pixel values of the pixels at the positions corresponding to the background movement amount v, even if the background object moves. For example, in  FIG. 61 , in the event that the movement amount v of the object corresponding to the background is 2, the virtual dividing number is 2, and the object corresponding to the background moves to the right side in the drawing, the pixel value B of the pixel in the background region in Expression (10) is the pixel value P 04 . 
   Expression (11) and Expression (12) include two variables, respectively, and accordingly the mixture ratio α can not be obtained in this state. Here, images generally have great correlation spatially, the adjacent pixels have approximately the same value. 
   Thus, since the foreground components have great correlation spatially, the mixture ratio is obtained by transforming the expression so as to obtain the sum of the foreground components from the previous or following frame. 
   The pixel value Mc of the seventh pixel from the left in the frame #n in  FIG. 63  may be represented in Expression (13). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 Mc 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         2 
                         v 
                       
                       · 
                       B 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     06 
                   
                   + 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         11 
                       
                       12 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         F 
                         i 
                       
                       / 
                       v 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 13 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   The first argument 2/v of the right side in Expression (13) corresponds to the mixture ratio α. The second argument of the right side in Expression (13) is represented as in Expression (14) using the pixel values in the following frame #n+1. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       i 
                       = 
                       11 
                     
                     12 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     
                       F 
                       i 
                     
                     / 
                     v 
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   β 
                   · 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         7 
                       
                       10 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         F 
                         i 
                       
                       / 
                       v 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 14 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, an assumption may be made that Expression (15) holds, using the spatial correlation of the foreground components.
 
F=F05=F06=F07=F08=F09=F10=F11=F12  (15)
 
   Expression (14) may be rewritten as Expression (16) using Expression (15). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           ∑ 
                           
                             i 
                             = 
                             11 
                           
                           12 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           
                             F 
                             i 
                           
                           / 
                           v 
                         
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           2 
                           v 
                         
                         · 
                         F 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         β 
                         · 
                         
                           4 
                           v 
                         
                         · 
                         F 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 16 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   As a result, β may be represented in Expression (17).
 
β=2/4  (17)
 
   In general, in the event that an assumption is made wherein the foreground components correlated to the mixed region are the same as shown in Expression (15), Expression (18) is formed by the relationship of the internal dividing ratio for all the pixel in the mixed region.
 
β=1−α  (18)
 
   In the event that Expression (18) holds, Expression (11) may develop as indicated in Expression (19). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       C 
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           P 
                         
                         + 
                         f 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           P 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               1 
                               - 
                               α 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           · 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 γ 
                               
                               
                                 γ 
                                 + 
                                 V 
                                 - 
                                 1 
                               
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               
                                 F 
                                 i 
                               
                               / 
                               v 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           P 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               1 
                               - 
                               α 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           · 
                           N 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 19 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Similarly, in the event that Expression (18) holds, Expression (12) may develop as indicated in Expression (20). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       C 
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           N 
                         
                         + 
                         f 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           N 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               1 
                               - 
                               α 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           · 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 γ 
                               
                               
                                 γ 
                                 + 
                                 V 
                                 - 
                                 1 
                               
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               
                                 F 
                                 i 
                               
                               / 
                               v 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           α 
                           · 
                           N 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               1 
                               - 
                               α 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           · 
                           P 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 20 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (19) and Expression (20), since C, N, and P are known pixel values, the variable included in Expression (19) and Expression (20) is only the mixture ratio α. The relationship between C, N, and P in Expression (19) and Expression (20) is illustrated in  FIG. 64 . C is the pixel value of the pixel of interest in the frame #n for calculating the mixture ratio α. N is the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1, of which the position in the spatial direction corresponds to that of the pixel of interest. P is the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1, of which the position in the spatial direction corresponds to that of the pixel of interest. 
   Accordingly, since Expression (19) and Expression (20) include one variable each, the mixture ratio α can be calculated using the pixel values in three frames. The conditions for calculating an accurate mixture ratio α by solving Expression (19) and Expression (20) are that; the foreground components with regard to the mixed region are the same, that is to say, in the foreground image object which has been taken in the state of the foreground object being still, the pixel values of pixels of a number double the movement amount v, which are arrayed sequentially at the boundary of the image object, corresponding to the movement direction of the foreground object, are constant. 
   As described above, the mixture ratio α of the pixel belonging to the covered background region is calculated by Expression (21), and the mixture ratio α belonging to the uncovered background region is calculated by Expression (22).
 
α=( C−N )/( P−N )  (21)
 
α=( C−P )/( N−P )  (22)
 
     FIG. 65  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 . Frame memory  421  stores the input image in increments of frames, and supplies the frame following the frame which is input as an input image, to frame memory  422  and a mixture ratio computation unit  423 . 
   The frame memory  422  stores the input image in increments of frames, and supplies the frame following the frame supplied from the frame memory  421 , to the mixture ratio computation unit  423 . 
   Accordingly, in the event that the frame #n+1 is input as an input image to the mixture ratio computation unit  423 , the frame memory  421  supplies the frame #n to the mixture ratio computation unit  423 , and the frame memory  422  supplies the frame #n−1 to the mixture ratio computation unit  423 . 
   The mixture ratio computation unit  423  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest by the computation represented in Expression (21) based upon the pixel value C of the pixel of interest in the frame #n, the pixel value N of the pixel in the frame #n+1 wherein the spatial position thereof corresponds to that of the pixel of interest, and the pixel value P of the pixel in the frame #n−1 wherein the spatial position thereof corresponds to that of the pixel of interest, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio. For example, in the event that the background keeps still, the mixture ratio computation unit  423  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest based upon the pixel value C of the pixel of interest in the frame #n, the pixel value N of the pixel in the frame #n+1 at the same position in the frame as the pixel of interest, and the pixel value P of the pixel in the frame #n−1 at the same position in the frame as the pixel of interest, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio. 
   As described above, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  can calculate the estimated mixture ratio based upon the input image, and supply to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . 
   Note that the processing of the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  is the same as that of the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  except for the processing wherein, while the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest by the computation represented in Expression (21), the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest by the computation represented in Expression (22), and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
     FIG. 66  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the estimated mixture ratio calculated by the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 . The estimated mixture ratio shown in  FIG. 66  indicates the results in a case wherein the foreground movement amount v corresponding to the object which moves at a constant velocity is 11, for one line. 
   It can be understood that the estimated mixture ratio changes generally linearly in the mixed region, as shown in  FIG. 60 . 
   Returning to  FIG. 59 , the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio α based upon the region information indicating which of the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, or the uncovered background region, the pixel which is the object of calculation of the mixture ratio α belongs to, supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . 
   In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the foreground region, the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio α to 0, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the background region, sets the mixture ratio α to 1, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the covered background region, sets the mixture ratio α to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 , and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the uncovered background region, sets the mixture ratio α to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402 . The mixture ratio decision unit  403  outputs the mixture ratio α which has been set based upon the region information. 
     FIG. 67  is a block diagram which illustrates another configuration of the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . A selection unit  441  supplies the pixels belonging to the covered background region and the corresponding pixels in the following and previous frames, to an estimated mixture ratio processing unit  442 , based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . The selection unit  441  supplies the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region and the corresponding pixels in the previous and following frames, to an estimated mixture ratio processing unit  443 , based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . 
   The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  442  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest belonging to the covered background region by the computation represented in Expression (21) based upon the pixel values input from the selection unit  441 , and supplies the calculated estimated mixture ratio to a selection unit  444 . 
   The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  443  calculates the estimated mixture ratio of the pixel of interest belonging to the uncovered background region by the computation represented in Expression (22) based upon the pixel values input from the selection unit  441 , and supplies the calculated estimated mixture ratio to the selection unit  444 . 
   In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the foreground region, the selection unit  444  selects the estimated mixture ratio of 0, and sets for the mixture ratio α, and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the background region, the selection unit  444  selects the estimated mixture ratio of 1, and sets for the mixture ratio α, based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the covered background region, the selection unit  444  selects the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  442 , and sets for the mixture ratio α, and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the uncovered background region, the selection unit  444  selects the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  443 , and sets this for the mixture ratio α. The selection unit  444  outputs the mixture ratio α which has been selected and set based upon the region information. 
   As described above, the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  having another configuration shown in  FIG. 67  can calculate the mixture ratio α for each pixel contained in the image, and output the calculated mixture ratio α. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 68 , the processing for calculation of the mixture ratio α by the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 59  will be described. In Step S 401 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  obtains the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . In Step S 402 , the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  performs processing of computation of the estimated mixture ratio by a model corresponding to the covered background region, and supplies the calculated estimated mixture ratio to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . Details of the processing for computation of the estimated mixture ratio will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 69 . 
   In Step S 403 , the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  performs the processing of the computation of the estimated mixture ratio by a model corresponding to the uncovered background region, and supplies the calculated mixture ratio to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . 
   In Step S 404 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  judges whether or not the mixture ratio α has been estimated for the entire frame, and in the event that judgment is made that the mixture ratio α has not been estimated for the entire frame, the flow returns to Step S 402 , and performs the processing of estimation of the mixture ratio α for the following pixel. 
   In the event that judgment is made in Step S 404  that the mixture ratio α has been estimated for the entire frame, the flow proceeds to Step S 405 , and the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio α based upon the region information which indicates which of the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, or the uncovered background region, the pixel belongs to, supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the foreground region, the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio α to 0, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the background region, sets the mixture ratio α to 1, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the covered background region, sets the mixture ratio α to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 , and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the uncovered background region, sets the mixture ratio α to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402 , and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  can calculate the mixture ratio α which is the amount of features corresponding to each pixel based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the input image. 
   The processing of calculation of the mixture ratio α by the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 67  is the same as the processing described in the flowchart shown in  FIG. 68 , so description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the covered background region, which corresponds to Step S 402  in  FIG. 68 , will now be described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 69 . 
   In Step S 421 , the mixture ratio computation unit  423  obtains the pixel value C of the pixel of interest in the frame #n from the frame memory  421 . 
   In Step S 422 , the mixture ratio computation unit  423  obtains the pixel value P of the pixel in the frame #n−1, which corresponds to the pixel of interest, from the frame memory  422 . 
   In Step S 423 , the mixture ratio computation unit  423  obtains the pixel value N of the pixel in the frame #n+1, which corresponds to the pixel of interest contained in the input image. 
   In Step S 424 , the mixture ratio computation unit  423  computes the estimated mixture ratio based upon the pixel value C of the pixel of interest in the frame #n, the pixel value P of the pixel in the frame #n−1, and the pixel value N of the pixel in the frame #n+1. 
   In Step S 425 , the mixture ratio computation unit  423  judges whether or not the processing for computation of the estimated mixture ratio has been ended for the entire frame, and in the event that judgment is made that the processing for computation of the estimated mixture ratio has not been ended for the entire frame, the flow returns to Step S 421 , and the processing for calculating of the estimated mixture ratio is repeated for the following pixel. 
   In Step S 425 , in the event that judgment is made that the processing for computation of the estimated mixture ratio has been ended for the entire frame, the processing ends. 
   As described above, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  can compute the estimated mixture ratio based upon the input image. 
   The processing of mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the uncovered background region shown in Step S 403  in  FIG. 68  is the same as the processing indicated in the flowchart shown in  FIG. 69 , wherein expressions corresponding to a model of the uncovered background region are used, and accordingly description thereof will be omitted. 
   Note that the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  442  and the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  443  shown in  FIG. 67  compute the estimated mixture ratio by performing the processing the same as the processing indicated in the flowchart shown in  FIG. 69 , and accordingly description thereof will be omitted. 
   Also, while description has been made with an assumption that the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the processing for obtaining the mixture ratio α described above may be applied even if the image corresponding to the background region contains movement. For example, in the event that the image corresponding to the background moves uniformly, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  shifts the entire image corresponding to the background movement, and performs processing in the same manner as in the case wherein the object corresponding to the background keeps still. Also, in the event that the image corresponding to the background region contains the background movement which is different at each local position, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  selects the pixels corresponding to the background movement as the pixels corresponding to the pixels belonging to the mixed region, and performs the processing described above. 
   Also, an arrangement may be made wherein the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  performs only the processing of the mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the covered background region for all pixels, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio as the mixture ratio α. In this case, the mixture ratio α indicates the ratio of the background components with regard to the pixels belonging to the covered background region, and indicates the ratio of the foreground components with regard to the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region. The image processing device can obtain the mixture ratio α indicating the ratio of the background components with regard to the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region, by calculating the absolute value of the difference between the mixture ratio α calculated as described above and 1, and setting the calculated absolute value for the mixture ratio α, with regard to the pixels belonging to the uncovered background region. 
   Note that similarly, an arrangement may be made wherein the mixture ratio calculating unit  104  performs only the processing for the mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the uncovered background region for all pixels, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio as the mixture ratio α. 
   Another processing of the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  will now be described. 
   An expression wherein the mixture ratio α and the sum of the foreground components f are approximated spatially can be formed, using the nature wherein the mixture ratio α changes linearly corresponding to the change of the pixel position due to the object corresponding to the foreground moving at a constant velocity within a shutter period. The mixture ratio α is calculated by solving the expression wherein the mixture ratio α and the sum of the foreground components f are approximated, using multiple sets of the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the mixed region and the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the background region. 
   In the event that the change of the mixture ratio α is generally linearly, the mixture ratio α is represented in Expression (23).
 
α= il+p   (23)
 
   In Expression (23), i denotes the index in the spatial direction wherein the position of the pixel of interest is 0. l is the inclination of the straight line of the mixture ratio α. p is the intercept of the straight line of the mixture ratio α, as well as the mixture ratio α of the pixel of interest. In Expression (23), while the index i is known, the inclination l and the intercept p are unknown. 
   The correlation between the index i, the inclination l, and the intercept p, is shown in  FIG. 70 . 
   In  FIG. 70  and  FIG. 71 , white circles indicate the pixel of interest. In  FIG. 70 , solid circles indicate pixels near the pixel of interest. 
   Multiple different mixture ratio α for multiple pixels are represented by two variables by approximating the mixture ratio α as in Expression (23). In the example shown in  FIG. 70 , five mixture ratios for five pixels are represented by two variables, i.e., the inclination l and the intercept p. 
   In the event of approximating the mixture ratio α in a planner manner shown in  FIG. 71 , taking the movement v corresponding to the two directions of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction of the image into consideration, the mixture ratio α is represented in Expression (24) by expanding Expression (23) onto a plane.
 
α= jm+kq+p   (24)
 
   In Expression (24), j is the index in the horizontal direction wherein the position of the pixel of interest is 0, and k is the index in the vertical direction. m is the inclination of the mixture ratio α in the horizontal direction, and q is the inclination of the plane of the mixture ratio α in the vertical direction. p is the intercept of the plane of the mixture ratio α. 
   For example, in the frame #n shown in  FIG. 61 , Expression (25) through Expression (27) hold with regard to C 05  through C 07 , respectively.
 
 C 05=α05· B 05/ v+f 05  (25)
 
 C 06=α06· B 06/ v+f 06  (26)
 
 C 07=α07· B 07/ v+f 07  (27)
 
   Making an assumption that the foreground components generally agree, i.e., that F 01  through F 03  are the same, and that F 01  through F 03  are written as Fc, Expression (28) holds.
 
 f ( x )=(1−α( x ))· Fc   (28)
 
   In Expression (28), x denotes the position in the spatial direction. 
   Rewriting α(x) as Expression (24), Expression (28) may be represented as Expression (29). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         f 
                         ⁡ 
                         
                           ( 
                           x 
                           ) 
                         
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             1 
                             - 
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 jm 
                                 + 
                                 kq 
                                 + 
                                 p 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                           
                           ) 
                         
                         · 
                         Fc 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           j 
                           · 
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               
                                 - 
                                 m 
                               
                               · 
                               Fc 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           k 
                           · 
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               
                                 - 
                                 q 
                               
                               · 
                               Fc 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 1 
                                 - 
                                 p 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             · 
                             Fc 
                           
                           ) 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         js 
                         + 
                         kt 
                         + 
                         u 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 29 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (29), (−m·Fc), (−q·Fc), and (1−p)·Fc are rewritten as Expression (30) through Expression (32).
 
 s=−m·Fc   (30)
 
 t=−q·Fc   (31)
 
 u =(1 −p )· Fc   (32)
 
   In Expression (29), j is the index in the horizontal direction wherein the position of pixel of interest is 0, and k is the index in the vertical direction. 
   As described above, since an assumption is made that the object corresponding to the foreground moves at a constant velocity within a shutter period, and the components corresponding to the foreground generally agree, the sum of the foreground components is approximated in Expression (29). 
   Note that in the event of approximating the mixture ratio α linearly, the sum of the foreground components may be represented in Expression (33).
 
 f ( x )= is+u   (33)
 
   Rewriting the mixture ratio α and the sum of the foreground components in Expression (13) using Expression (24) and Expression (29), the pixel value M is represented in Expression (34). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       M 
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             ( 
                             
                               jm 
                               + 
                               kq 
                               + 
                               p 
                             
                             ) 
                           
                           · 
                           B 
                         
                         + 
                         js 
                         + 
                         kt 
                         + 
                         u 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           jB 
                           · 
                           m 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           kB 
                           · 
                           q 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           · 
                           p 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           j 
                           · 
                           s 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           k 
                           · 
                           t 
                         
                         + 
                         u 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 34 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (34), the unknown variables are the six values of the inclination of the plane of the mixture ratio α in the horizontal direction, m, the inclination of the plane of the mixture ratio α in the vertical direction, q, the intercepts of the plane of the mixture ratio α, p, s, t, and u. 
   Setting the pixel value M and pixel value B for the normal equation represented in Expression (34) corresponding to the pixels near the pixel of interest, the mixture ratio α is calculated by solving multiple normal equations wherein the pixel value M and the pixel value B have been set, by the least square method. 
   For example, with the index j of the pixel of interest in the horizontal direction as 0, with the index k of the pixel of interest in the vertical direction as 0, and setting the pixel value M or the pixel value B for the normal equation represented in Expression (34) with regard to 3×3 pixels near the pixel of interest, Expression (35) through Expression (43) are obtained.
 
 M   −1,−1 =(−1)· B   −1,−1   ·m +(−1)· B   −1,−1   ·q+B   −1,−1   ·p +(−1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (35)
 
 M   0,−1 =(0)· B   0,−1   ·m +(−1)· B   0,−1   ·q+B   0,−1   ·p +(0)· s +(−1)· t+u   (36)
 
 M   +1,−1 =(+1)· B   +1,−1   ·m +(−1)· B   +1,−1   ·q+B   +1,−1   ·p +(+1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (37)
 
 M   −1,0 =(−1)· B   −1,0   ·m +(0)· B   −1,0   ·q+B   −1,0   ·p +(−1)· s +(0)· t+u   (38)
 
 M   0,0 =(0)· B   0,0   ·m +(0)· B   0,0   ·q+B   0,0   ·p +(0)· s +(0)· t+u   (39)
 
 M   +1,0 =(+1)· B   +1,0   ·m +(0)· B   +1,0   ·q+B   +1,0   ·p +(+1)· s +(0)· t+u   (40)
 
 M   −1,+1 =(−1)· B   −1,+1   ·m +(+1)· B   −1,+1   ·q+B   −1,+1   ·p +(−1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (41)
 
 M   0,+1 =(0)· B   0,+1   ·m +(+1)· B   0,+1   ·q+B   0,+1   ·p +(0)· s +(+1)· t+u   (42)
 
 M   +1,+1 =(+1)· B   +1,+1   ·m +(+1)· B   +1,+1   ·q+B   +1,+1   ·p +(+1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (43)
 
   Since the index of the pixel of interest in the horizontal direction, j, is 0, and the index in the vertical direction, k, is 0, the mixture ratio α of the pixel of interest is equal to the value wherein j=0 and k=0, from Expression (24), i.e., the intercept p. 
   Accordingly, the intercept p can be output as the mixture ratio α by calculating the inclination in the horizontal direction, m, the inclination in the vertical direction, q, the intercept p, s, t, and u, by the least square method, based upon the nine expressions of Expression (35) through Expression (43). 
   More specific procedures for calculating the mixture ratio α by applying the least square method will now be described. 
   Representing the index i and the index k with one index x, the relationship between the index i, the index k, and the index x, is represented in Expression (44).
 
 x =( j+ 1)·3+( k+ 1)  (44)
 
   The inclination in the horizontal direction, m, the inclination in the vertical direction, q, the intercept p, s, t, and u, are represented by variables, w 0 , w 1 , w 2 , w 3 , w 4 , and w 5 , respectively, and jB, kB, B, j, k, and l are represented by a 0 , a 1 , a 2 , a 3 , a 4 , and a 5 , respectively. Taking the margin of error ex into consideration, Expression (35) through Expression (43) are rewritten as Expression (45). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   M 
                   x 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         y 
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                       5 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       ay 
                       · 
                       wy 
                     
                   
                   + 
                   ex 
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 45 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (45), x denotes one of the integers between 0 and 8. 
   Expression (46) may be derived from Expression (45). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   e 
                   x 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     M 
                     x 
                   
                   - 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         y 
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                       5 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       ay 
                       · 
                       wy 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 46 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   To apply the least square method, the sum of squares of margin of error E is defined as represented in Expression (47). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 E 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       x 
                       = 
                       0 
                     
                     8 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     ex 
                     2 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 47 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   To minimize the margin of error, the partial derivative of the squared-sum of the margin of error E from the variable Wv should be 0. Here v is one of the integers between 0 through 5. Accordingly, wy is calculated so as to satisfy Expression (48). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           ∂ 
                           E 
                         
                         
                           ∂ 
                           wv 
                         
                       
                       = 
                       
                         2 
                         · 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               x 
                               = 
                               0 
                             
                             8 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             ex 
                             · 
                             
                               
                                 ∂ 
                                 ex 
                               
                               
                                 ∂ 
                                 wv 
                               
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           2 
                           · 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 x 
                                 = 
                                 0 
                               
                               8 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               ex 
                               · 
                               av 
                             
                           
                         
                         = 
                         0 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 48 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Substituting Expression (46) for Expression (48), Expression (49) is obtained. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       x 
                       = 
                       0 
                     
                     8 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       av 
                       · 
                       
                         
                           ∑ 
                           
                             y 
                             = 
                             0 
                           
                           5 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           ay 
                           · 
                           wy 
                         
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       x 
                       = 
                       0 
                     
                     8 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     av 
                     · 
                     
                       M 
                       x 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 49 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Applying, for example, the sweeping method (Gauss-Jordan elimination) and so forth, to the six expressions each of which is obtained by substituting-one of the integers between 0 and 5 for v in Expression (49), wy is calculated. As described above, w 0  denotes the inclination in the horizontal direction, m, w 1  denotes the inclination in the vertical direction, q, w 2  denotes the intercept p, w 3  denotes s, w 4  denotes t, and w 5  denotes u. 
   As described above, the inclination in the horizontal direction, m, the inclination in the vertical direction, q, the intercept p, s, t, and u may be obtained by applying the least square method to an expression wherein the pixel value M and the pixel value B have been set. 
   In the description corresponding to Expression (35) through Expression (43), while description has been made with the pixel value of the pixel included in the mixed region as M, and the pixel value of the pixel included in the background region as B, the normal equation needs to be formed for each case of the pixel of interest being included in the covered background region, and being included in the uncovered background region. 
   For example, in a case of obtaining the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the covered background region of the frame #n shown in  FIG. 61 , the pixels of the frame #n, C 04  through C 08 , and the pixel values of the pixels of the frame #n−1, P 04  through P 08 , are set for the normal equation. 
   In a case of obtaining the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the uncovered background region of the frame #n shown in  FIG. 62 , the pixels of the frame #n, C 28  through C 32 , and the pixel values of the pixels of the frame #n+1, N 28  through N 32 , are set for the normal equation. 
   Also, for example, in the event of calculating the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the covered background region shown in  FIG. 72 , Expression (50) through Expression (58) shown below may be formed. The pixel value of the pixel for calculation of the mixture ratio α is Mc 5 .
 
 Mc 1=(−1)· Bc 1· m +(−1)· Bc 1· q+Bc 1· p +(−1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (50)
 
 Mc 2=(0)· Bc 2· m +(−1)· Bc 2· q+Bc 2· p +(0)· s +(−1)· t+u   (51)
 
 Mc 3=(+1)· Bc 3· m +(−1)· Bc 3· q+Bc 3· p +(+1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (52)
 
 Mc 4=(−1)· Bc 4· m +(0)· Bc 4· q+Bc 4· p +(−1)· s +(0)· t+u   (53)
 
 Mc 5=(0)· Bc 5· m +(0)· Bc 5· q+Bc 5· p +(0)· s +(0)· t+u   (54)
 
 Mc 6=(+1)· Bc 6· m +(0)· Bc 6· q+Bc 6· p +(+1)· s +(0)· t+u   (55)
 
 Mc 7=(−1)· Bc 7· m +(+1)· Bc 7· q+Bc 7· p +(−1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (56)
 
 Mc 8=(0)· Bc 8· m +(+1)· Bc 8· q+Bc 8· p +(0)· s +(1)· t+u   (57)
 
 Mc 9=(+1)· Bc 9· m +(+1)· Bc 9· q+Bc 9· p +(+1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (58)
 
   In the event of calculating the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the covered background region in the frame #n, the pixel values Bc 1  through Bc 9  of the pixels in the background region in the frame #n−1 corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, are used in Expression (50) through Expression (58). 
   In  FIG. 72 , white circles indicate the pixels which are regarded as backgrounds, and solid circles indicate the pixels which are regarded as pixels in the mixed region. 
   In the event of calculating the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the uncovered background region shown in  FIG. 72 , Expression (59) through Expression (67) described below may be formed. The pixel value of the pixel for calculation of the mixture ratio α is Mu 5 .
 
 Mu 1=(−1)· Bu 1· m +(−1)· Bu 1· q+Bu 1· p +(−1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (59)
 
 Mu 2=(0)· Bu 2· m +(−1)· Bu 2· q+Bu 2· p +(0)· s +(−1)· t+u   (60)
 
 Mu 3=(+1)· Bu 3· m +(−1)· Bu 3· q+Bu 3· p +(+1)· s +(−1)· t+u   (61)
 
 Mu 4=(−1)· Bu 4· m +(0)· Bu 4· q+Bu 4· p +(−1)· s +(0)· t+u   (62)
 
 Mu 5=(0)· Bu 5· m +(0)· Bu 5· q+Bu 5· p +(0)· s +(0)· t+u   (63)
 
 Mu 6=(+1)· Bu 6· m +(0)· Bu 6· q+Bu 6· p +(+1)· s +(0)· t+u   (64)
 
 Mu 7=(−1)· Bu 7· m +(+1)· Bu 7· q+Bu 7· p +(−1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (65)
 
 Mu 8=(0)· Bu 8· m +(+1)· Bu 8· q+Bu 8· p +(0)· s +(1)· t+u   (66)
 
 Mu 9=(+1)· Bu 9· m +(+1)· Bu 9· q+Bu 9· p +(+1)· s +(+1)· t+u   (67)
 
   In the event of calculating the mixture ratio α of the pixel included in the uncovered background region in the frame #n, the pixel values Bu 1  through Bu 9  of the pixels in the background region in the frame #n+1 corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, are used in Expression (59) through Expression (67). 
     FIG. 73  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 . The image input to the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  is supplied to a delay circuit  501  and an addition unit  502 . 
   The delay circuit  501  delays the input image by one frame, and supplies to the addition unit  502 . At the point that the frame #n is input to the addition unit  502  as an input image, the delay circuit  501  supplies the frame #n−1 to the addition unit  502 . 
   The addition unit  502  sets the pixel values of the pixels near the pixel for calculation of the mixture ratio α, and the pixel values of the frame #n−1, for the normal equation. For example, the addition unit  502  sets the pixel values Mc 1  through Mc 9 , and the pixel values Bc 1  through Bc 9  for the normal equation based upon Expression (50) through Expression (58). The addition unit  502  supplies the normal equation for which the pixel values have been set, to a computation unit  503 . 
   The computation unit  503  obtains the estimated mixture ratio by solving the normal equation supplied from the addition unit  502  by the sweeping method or the like, and outputs the obtained estimated mixture ratio. 
   As described above, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  can calculate the estimated mixture ratio based upon the input image, and supply to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . 
   Note that the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  has the same configuration as the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 , and accordingly description thereof will be omitted. 
     FIG. 74  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the estimated mixture ratio calculated by the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 .  FIG. 74  illustrates the estimated mixture ratio with regard to one line, wherein the movement v of the foreground corresponding to the object which moves at a constant velocity is 11, and the results are calculated by the expression generated in increments of blocks 7×7 pixels. 
   It can be understood that the estimated mixture ratio changes generally linearly in the mixed region as shown in  FIG. 60 . 
   The mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio based upon the region information indicating which of the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, or the uncovered background region the pixel for calculation of the mixture ratio belongs to, supplied from the region specifying unit  101 . In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the foreground region, the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio to 0, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the background region, sets the mixture ratio to 1, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the covered background region, sets the mixture ratio to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 , and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the uncovered background region, sets the mixture ratio to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402 . The mixture ratio decision unit  403  outputs the mixture ratio which is set based upon the region information. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 75 , the processing for calculation of the mixture ratio by the mixture ratio calculating unit  102  in a case that the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  has a configuration shown in  FIG. 73  will be described. In Step S 501 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  102  obtains the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  101 . In Step S 502 , the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  performs the processing of mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the covered background region, and supplies the estimated mixture ratio to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . Details of the processing for mixture ratio estimation will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 76 . 
   In Step S 503 , the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  performs the processing of mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the uncovered background region, and supplies the estimated mixture ratio to the mixture ratio decision unit  403 . 
   In Step S 504 , the mixture ratio calculating unit  102  judges whether or not the mixture ratio has been estimated for the entire frame, and in the event that judgment is made that the mixture ratio has not been estimated for the entire frame, the flow returns to Step S 502 , and the processing of mixture ratio estimation for the following pixel is performed. 
   In Step S 504 , in the event that judgment is made that the mixture ratio has been estimated for the entire frame, the flow proceeds to Step S 505 , and the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio based upon the region information which indicates which of the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, or the uncovered background region the pixel of calculation of the mixture ratio belongs to, supplied from the region specifying unit  101 . In the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the foreground region, the mixture ratio decision unit  403  sets the mixture ratio to 0, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the background region, sets the mixture ratio to 1, in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the covered background region, sets the mixture ratio to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401 , and in the event that the pixel which is the object belongs to the uncovered background region, sets the mixture ratio to the estimated mixture ratio supplied from the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402 , and processing ends. 
   As described above, the mixture ratio calculating unit  102  can calculate the mixture ratio α which is the amount of features corresponding to each pixel based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  101  and the input image. 
   Using the mixture ratio α enables the separation of the foreground components and the background components contained in the pixel value while leaving the information of movement blurring contained in the image corresponding to the moving object. 
   Also, synthesizing an image based upon the mixture ratio α enables creation of an image containing accurate movement blurring corresponding to the speed of the object which moves as if image taking of the real world had been performed again. 
   The processing for the mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the covered background region, which corresponds to Step S 502  shown in  FIG. 75 , will now be described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 76 . 
   In Step S 521 , the addition unit  502  sets the pixel values contained in the input image and the pixels contained the image supplied from the delay circuit  501  for the normal equation corresponding to a model of the covered background region. 
   In Step S 522 , the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  judges whether or not setting of the pixel which is the object has ended, and in the event that judgment is made that the setting for the pixel which is the object has not ended, the flow returns to Step S 521 , and the processing of setting of the pixel value for the normal equation is repeated. 
   In Step S 522 , in the event that judgment is made that setting of pixel values with regard to the pixel which is the object has ended, the flow proceeds to Step S 523 , and the computation unit  503  computes the estimated mixture ratio based upon the normal equation which the pixel values have been set for, and outputs the obtained estimated mixture ratio. 
   As described above, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  can computes the estimated mixture ratio based upon the input image. 
   The processing for mixture ratio estimation by a model corresponding to the uncovered background region in Step S 153  shown in  FIG. 75  is the same as the processing shown in the flowchart in  FIG. 76  using the normal equation corresponding to a model of the uncovered background region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   Note that while description has been made with an assumption that the object corresponding to the background keeps still, the processing of obtaining the mixture ratio described above may be applied even if the image corresponding to the background contains movement. For example, in the event that the image corresponding to the background region moves uniformly, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  shifts the entire image corresponding to the movement, and performs processing in the same manner as a case wherein the object corresponding to the background keeps still. Also, in the event that the image corresponding to the background contains different movement at each local position, the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  selects pixels corresponding to the movement as pixels corresponding to pixels belonging to the mixed region, and performs the above-described processing. 
   The foreground/background separation unit  105  will now be described.  FIG. 77  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The input image supplied to the foreground/background separation unit  105  is supplied to a separation unit  601 , a switch  602 , and a switch  603 . The region information indicating the covered background region and the uncovered background region, which is supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , is supplied to the separation unit  601 . The region information indicating the foreground region is supplied to the switch  602 . The region information indicating the background region is supplied to the switch  603 . 
   The mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  is supplied to the separation unit  601 . 
   The separation unit  601  separates the background components from the covered background region in the input image, as well as foreground components, based upon the region information which indicates the covered background region and the mixture ratio α, and outputs the foreground component image in the covered background region which consists of the separated foreground components, and the background component image in the covered background region which consists of the separated background components. 
   The separation unit  601  separates the background components from the uncovered background region in the input image, as well as foreground components, based upon the region information which indicates the uncovered background region and the mixture ratio α, and outputs the foreground component image in the uncovered background region which consists of the separated foreground components, and the background component image in the uncovered background region which consists of the separated background components. 
   In the event of inputting the pixel corresponding to the foreground region, the switch  602  is closed based upon the region information which indicates the foreground region, and outputs the image in the foreground region. 
   In the event of inputting the pixel corresponding to the background region, the switch  603  is closed based upon the region information which indicates the background region, and outputs the image in the background region. 
     FIGS. 78A  and  FIG. 78B  are diagrams which illustrate the input image input to the foreground/background separation unit  105 , and the foreground component image and the background component image, output from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
     FIG. 78A  is a schematic diagram which illustrates the displayed image, and  FIG. 78B  is a model diagram wherein one line of pixels including pixels belonging to the foreground region, pixels belonging to the background region, and pixels belonging to the mixed region, corresponding to  FIG. 78A , develop over the time direction. 
   As shown in  FIGS. 78A and 78B , the image in the background region output from the foreground/background separation unit  105  is made up of pixels belonging to the background region. 
   As shown in  FIGS. 78A and 78B , the image in the foreground region output from the foreground/background separation unit  105  is made up of pixels belonging to the foreground region. 
   The pixel value of the pixel in the uncovered background region is separated into the background components and the foreground components by the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The separated background components make up the background component image in the uncovered background region, and the separated foreground components make up the foreground component image in the uncovered background region. 
   The pixel value of the pixel in the covered background region is separated into the background components and the foreground components by the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The separated background components make up the background component image in the covered background region, and the separated foreground components make up the foreground component image in the covered background region. 
   A description will now be made regarding the separation processing for the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region performed by the separation unit  601 . 
     FIG. 79  is a model of an image which indicates two frames of the foreground components and the background components, including the foreground corresponding to the object which moves from the left to the right in the drawing. In the model of the image shown in  FIG. 79 , the movement amount v of the foreground is 4, and the virtual dividing number is 4. 
   In the frame #n, the left-most pixel and the fourteenth through eighteenth pixels from the left are made up of only the background components, and belong to the background region. In the frame #n, the second through fourth pixels from the left are made up of the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the uncovered background region. In the frame #n, the eleventh through thirteenth pixels from the left are made up of the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the covered background region. In the frame #n, the fifth through tenth pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components, and belong to the foreground region. 
   In the frame #n+1, the first through fifth pixels from the left and the eighteenth pixel from the left are made up of only the background components, and belong to the background region. In the frame #n+1, the sixth through eighth pixels from the left contain the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the uncovered background region. In the frame #n+1, the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left contain the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the covered background region. In the frame #n+1, the ninth through fourteen pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components, and belong to the foreground region. 
     FIG. 80  is a diagram which describes the processing for separation of the foreground components from the pixel belonging to the covered background region. In  FIG. 80 , α 1  through α 18  are the mixture ratios corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, respectively. In  FIG. 80 , the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left belong to the covered background region. 
   The pixel value C 15  of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (68). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         C 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         15 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             15 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             B 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             P 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 68 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, α 15  denotes the mixture ratio of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n. P 15  denotes the pixel value of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1. 
   The sum f 15  of the foreground components of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (69) based upon Expression (68). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         f 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         15 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           C 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         - 
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             P 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 69 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Similarly, the sum f 16  of the foreground components of the sixteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (70), and the sum f 17  of the foreground components of the seventeenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (71).
 
 f 16= C 16−α16· P 16  (70)
 
 f 17= C 17−α17· P 17  (71)
 
   As described above, the foreground component fc contained in the pixel value C of the pixel belonging to the covered background region is calculated by Expression (72).
 
 fc=C−α·P   (72)
 
   P denotes the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the previous frame. 
     FIG. 81  is a diagram which describes the processing for separating the foreground components from the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region. In  FIG. 81 , α 1  through α 18  denote the mixture ratio corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, respectively. In  FIG. 81 , the second through fourth pixels from the left belong to the uncovered background region. 
   The pixel value C 02  of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (73). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         C 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         02 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             B 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             N 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 73 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, α 2  denotes the mixture ratio of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n. N 02  denotes the pixel value of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n+1. 
   The foreground component sum of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 02 , is represented in Expression (74) based upon Expression (73). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         f 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         02 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         F 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           01 
                           / 
                           v 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           C 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         - 
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             N 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 74 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Similarly, the foreground component sum of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 03 , is represented in Expression (75), and the foreground component sum of the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 04 , is represented in Expression (76).
 
 f 03= C 03−α3· N 03  (75)
 
 f 04= C 04−α4· N 04  (76)
 
   As described above, the foreground component fu contained in the pixel value C of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region is calculated by Expression (77).
 
 fu=C−α·N   (77)
 
   N denotes the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the following frame. 
   As described above, the separation unit  601  can separate the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region based upon the information indicating the covered background region and the information indicating the uncovered background region, which is included in the region information, and the mixture ratio α for each pixel. 
     FIG. 82  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the separation unit  601  for performing the processing described above. The image input to the separation unit  601  is supplied to frame memory  621 , and the region information indicating the covered background region and the uncovered background region supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 , and the mixture ratio α is input to a separation processing block  622 . 
   The frame memory  621  stores the input image in increments of frames. In the event that the object of processing is the frame #n, the frame memory  621  stores the frame #n−1 which is the frame previous to the frame #n, frame #n, and the frame #n+1 which is the frame following the frame #n. 
   The frame memory  621  supplies the corresponding pixels in the frame #n−1, the frame #n, and the frame #n+1 to the separation processing block  622 . 
   The separation processing block  622  separates the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n by applying the computation described with reference to  FIG. 80  and  FIG. 81  to the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the frame #n−1, the frame #n, and the frame #n+1 supplied from the frame memory  621  based upon the region information which indicates the covered background region and the uncovered background region and the mixture ratio α. 
   The separation processing block  622  comprises an uncovered region processing unit  631  and a covered region processing unit  632 . 
   A multiplication device  641  of the uncovered region processing unit  631  multiplies the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n+1 supplied from the frame memory  621  by the mixture ratio α, and outputs to a switch  642 . In the event that the pixel (corresponding to the pixel in the frame #n+1) in the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  621  belongs to the uncovered background region, the switch  642  is closed, and supplies the pixel value multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the multiplication device  641  to a computation device  643 . The value wherein the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n+1 is multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the switch  642 , is the same as the background component of the pixel value of the pixel corresponding to the frame #n, and is output as a background component image in the uncovered background region. 
   The computation device  643  obtains the foreground components by subtracting the background components supplied from the switch  642  from the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  621 . The computation device  643  outputs the foreground component image made up of pixels in the frame #n belonging to the uncovered background region. 
   A multiplication device  651  of the covered region processing unit  632  multiplies the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n−1 supplied from the frame memory  621  by the mixture ratio α, and outputs to a switch  652 . In the event that the pixel (corresponding to the pixel in the frame #n−1) in the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  621  belongs to the covered background region, the switch  652  is closed, and supplies the pixel value multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the multiplication device  651  to a computation device  653 . The value wherein the pixel value of the pixel in the frame #n−1 is multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the switch  652 , is the same as the background component of the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the frame #n, and is output as a background component image in the covered background region. 
   The computation device  653  obtains the foreground components by subtracting the background components supplied from the switch  652  from the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  621 . The computation device  653  outputs the foreground component image made up of pixels in the frame #n belonging to the covered background region. 
   Using the mixture ratio α which is the amount of features enables entire separation of the foreground component and background component, contained in the pixel value. 
   The separation processing for the foreground and the background by the foreground/background separation unit  105  will now be described, with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 83 . In Step S 601 , the frame memory  621  of the separation unit  601  obtains the input image, and stores the frame #n which is the object of the separation of the foreground and the background, as well as the previous frame #n−1 and the following frame #n+1. 
   In Step S 602 , the separation processing block  622  of the separation unit  601  obtains the region information supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . In Step S 603 , the separation processing block  622  of the separation unit  601  obtains the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . 
   In Step S 604 , the uncovered region processing unit  631  extracts the background components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the frame memory  621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, and outputs as the background component image in the uncovered background region. 
   In Step S 605 , the uncovered region processing unit  631  extracts the foreground components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the frame memory  621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, and outputs as the foreground component image in the uncovered background region. 
   In Step S 606 , the covered region processing unit  632  extracts the background components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the frame memory  621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, and outputs as the background component image in the covered background region. 
   In Step S 607 , the covered region processing unit  632  extracts the foreground components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the frame memory  621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, outputs as the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the foreground/background separation unit  105  can separate the foreground components and the background components from the input image based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, and output the foreground component image which is made up of only the foreground components, and the background component image which is made up of only the background components. 
     FIG. 84  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the separated image processing unit  106  for generating a coefficient set which is used for the class classification adaptation processing for generating an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction. For example, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 84  generates a coefficient set which is used for the class classification adaptation processing for generating an HD image from an SD image based upon the input HD image. 
   Background region tutor image frame memory  701  stores the image in the background region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The background region tutor image frame memory  701  supplies the stored image in the background region in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 1  and a learning unit  714 - 1 . 
   Uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702  stores the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702  supplies the stored background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 2  and a learning unit  714 - 2 . 
   Uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703  stores the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703  supplies the stored foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 3  and a learning unit  714 - 4 . 
   Covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704  stores the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704  supplies the stored background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 4  and a learning unit  714 - 4 . 
   Covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705  stores the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705  supplies the stored foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 5  and a learning unit  714 - 5 . 
   Foreground region tutor image frame memory  706  stores the image in the foreground region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The foreground region tutor image frame memory  706  supplies the stored foreground image in the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  707 - 6  and a learning unit  714 - 6 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 1  generates an SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the image in the background region in the tutor image which is an HD image, for example, supplied from the background region tutor image frame memory  701 , and supplies the generated SD image to background region student image frame memory  708 . 
   For example, the weighted averaging unit  707 - 1  takes four pixels of 2×2 (width×height) (which are portions represented by white circles in the drawing) as one increment in the tutor image as shown in  FIG. 85 , adds the pixel values of four pixels in each increment, and the sum is divided by 4. The weighted averaging unit  707 - 1  sets the ¼ weighted averaged results described above for the pixel of the student image positioned at the center of each increment (which are the portions represented by solid circles in the drawing). 
   The background region student image frame memory  708  stores the student image corresponding to the image in the background region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 1 . The background region student image frame memory  708  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the image in the background region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 1 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 2  generates an SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image which is an HD image, for example, supplied from the uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702 , and supplies the generated SD image to uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709 . 
   The uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709  stores the student image, which is an SD image, corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 2 . The uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 2 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 3  generates an SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image which is an HD image, for example, supplied from the uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703 , and supplies the generated SD image to uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  710 . 
   The uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  710  stores the student image, which is an SD image, corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 3 . The uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  710  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 3 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 4  generates an SD image, which is a student image, by ¼ weighted-averaging the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image, for example, supplied from the covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704 , and supplies the generated SD image to covered background region background component student image frame memory  711 . 
   The covered background region background component student image frame memory  711  stores the student image, which is an SD image, corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 4 . The covered background region background component student image frame memory  711  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 4 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 5  generates an SD image, which is a student image, by ¼ weighted-averaging the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image, for example, supplied from the covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705 , and supplies the generated SD image to covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712 . 
   The covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712  stores the student image, which is an SD image, corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 5 . The covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 5 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 6  generates an SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the image in the foreground region in the tutor image which is an HD image, for example, supplied from the foreground region tutor image frame memory  706 , and supplies the generated SD image to foreground region student image frame memory  713 . 
   The foreground region student image frame memory  713  stores the student image, which is an SD image, corresponding to the image in the foreground region in the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  707 - 6 . The foreground region student image frame memory  713  supplies the stored student image corresponding to the image in the foreground region in the tutor image to the learning unit  714 - 6 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 1  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background region based upon the image in the background region in the tutor image supplied from the background region tutor image frame memory  701  and the student image corresponding to the image in the background region in the tutor image supplied from the background region student image frame memory  708 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 2  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region based upon the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 3  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region based upon the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image supplied from the uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  909 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 4  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region based upon the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the covered background region background component student image frame memory  711 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 5  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region based upon the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image supplied from the covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The learning unit  714 - 6  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region based upon the image in the foreground region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground region tutor image frame memory  706  and the student image corresponding to the image in the foreground region in the tutor image supplied from the foreground region student image frame memory  713 , and supplies the generated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715 . 
   The coefficient set memory  715  stores the coefficient set corresponding to the background region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 1 , the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 2 , the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 3 , the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 4 , the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 5 , and the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region supplied from the learning unit  714 - 6 . 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate between the learning unit  714 - 1  through the learning unit  714 - 6 , individually, these will be simply referred to as a learning unit  714  below. 
     FIG. 86  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the learning unit  714 . 
   A class classification unit  731  comprises a class tap obtaining unit  751  and a waveform classification unit  752 , and classifies the pixel of interest of the input student image. The class tap obtaining unit  751  obtains a predetermined number of class taps which are pixels of the student image corresponding to the pixel of interest, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  752 . 
   For example, in  FIG. 85 , in the event that the pixel which is the i&#39;th from the top and the j&#39;th from the left in the student image (which is a portion indicated by a solid circle in the drawing) is represented by X ij , the class tap obtaining unit  751  obtains a class tap which consists of nine pixels in total, i.e., the eight pixels at left-top, right-top, left, right, bottom-left, bottom, and right-bottom, adjacent to the pixel of interest X ij , X (i−1)(j−1) , X (i−1)j , X (i−1)(j+1) , X i(j−1) , X i(j+1) , X (i−1)(j−1) , X (i−1)j , and X (i+1)(j+1) , and also the pixel of interest. The class tap is supplied to the waveform classification unit  752 . 
   Note that in this case, while the class tap consists of a square-shaped block made up of 3×3 pixels, this needs not be a square; rather other arbitrary shapes may be used, for example, a rectangle-shape, a cross-shape, or the like. Also, the number of pixels making up the class tap is not restricted to nine pixels of 3×3 pixels. 
   The waveform classification unit  752  performs class classification processing wherein the input signals are classified into several classes based upon the features thereof, and classifies the pixel of interest into one class based upon the class taps. For example, the waveform classification unit  752  classifies the pixel of interest into one of 512 classes, and supplies the class No. corresponding to the classified class to a prediction tap obtaining unit  732 . 
   Here, the class classification processing will now be described briefly. 
   Now, let us say that a given pixel of interest and three adjacent pixels make up a class tap which consists of 2×2 pixels as shown in  FIG. 87A , and each pixel is represented by 1 bit (has a level of either 0 or 1). In  FIG. 87A , the solid circle denotes the pixel of interest. In this case, four pixel block of 2×2 pixels containing the pixel of interest can be classified into 16(=(2 1 ) 4 ) patterns by the level distribution for each pixel as shown in  FIG. 87B . In  FIG. 87B , white circles denote 0, and solid circles denote 1. Accordingly, in this case, the pixel of interest can be classified into sixteen patterns, wherein pattern-classification is the class-classification processing, and the processing is performed by the class classification unit  731 . 
   Here, each pixel is generally appropriated around 8 bits. Also, with the present embodiment, the class tap consists of nine pixels of 3×3 pixels as described above. Accordingly, performing class classification processing for such a class tap as an object, the class tap would result the class tap being classified into a great number of classes of which number is (2 8 ) 9 . 
   Accordingly, with the present embodiment, the ADCR processing is performed for the class tap by the waveform classification unit  752 , and this reduces the number of classes by reducing the number of bits of the pixels making up the class tap. 
   In order to simplify description, the maximum value of the pixel value MAX and the minimum value of the pixel value MIN are detected in the ADRC processing with a class tap which consists of four pixels arrayed in a line as shown in  FIG. 88A . DR=MAX−MIN is then taken as the local dynamic range in the block which consists of a class tap, and the pixel values of the pixels making up the block of the class tap is re-quantized into K bits based upon the dynamic range DR. 
   That is to say, the minimum value MIN is subtracted from each pixel value within the block, and the subtraction value is divided by DR/2 k . The division value obtained as a result is converted into the code (ADRC code) corresponding thereto. Specifically, for example, in the event of taking K as 2, judgment is made which of ranges obtained by dividing the dynamic range DR into four (=2 2 ) equal parts the division value belongs to, as shown in  FIG. 88B , and upon the division value belonging to the range of the bottom-most level, the range of the second level from the bottom, the range of the third level from the bottom, or the range of upper-most level, the division value is encoded into 2-bit code such as 00B, 01B, 10B, or 11B (B indicates a binary number), respectively, for example. Decoding is then performed on the decoding side by the ADRC code 00B, 01B, 10B, or 11B being converted into the median in the range of the most-bottom level L 00 , the median in the range of the second level from the bottom L 01 , the median in the range of the third level from the bottom L 10 , or the median in the range of the most-upper level L 11 , wherein the ranges are obtained by dividing the dynamic range DR into four equal parts, and the minimum value MIN being added to the converted value. 
   Here, the ADRC processing described above is referred to as non-edge-matching. 
   Note that details with regard to the ADRC processing are disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 3-53778, which has been applied by the present applicant, and so forth, for example. 
   The class No. can be reduced by performing the ADRC processing which performs re-quantizing with the number of bits less than the number of bits appropriated to pixels making up the class tap as described above, and the ADRC processing described above is performed by the waveform classifying unit  752 . 
   While the class classification processing is performed based upon the ADRC code by the waveform classification unit  752  in the present embodiment, an arrangement may be made wherein the class classification processing is performed with regard to the data which has been subjected to DPCM (Predictive Coding), BTC (Block Truncation Coding), VQ (Vector Quantizing), DCT (Disperse Cosine Transformation), Hadamard transformation, or the like. 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  732  obtains the prediction tap which is the increment for calculation of the predicted value of the original image (tutor image) corresponding to the class based upon the class No. from pixels of the student image, and supplies the obtained prediction tap and the class No. to a corresponding pixel obtaining unit  733 . 
   For example, in  FIG. 85 , let us say that pixel values of nine pixels of 2×2 centered on the pixel X ij  in the student image (which is denoted by a solid circle in the drawing) in the original image (tutor image) are represented as Y ij (1), Y ij (2), Y ij (3), and Y ij (4), respectively, in the direction from the far left to the right, and in the direction from the top to the bottom, the prediction tap obtaining unit  732  obtains a square-shaped prediction tap which consists of nine pixels of 3×3, X (i−1)(j−1) , X (i−1)j , X (i−1)(j+1)  X i(j−1) , X ij , X i(j+1) , X (i+1)(j−1) , X (i+1)j , and X (i+1)(j+1) , centered on the pixel X ij  in the student image, for example, for calculating the coefficients which are necessary for calculation of the predicted values of the pixels Y ij (1) through Y ij (4). 
   Specifically, for example, the pixels X 22 , X 23 , X 24 , X 32 , X 33 , X 34 , X 42 , X 43 , and X 44  make up the prediction tap for calculating the coefficients which are necessary for calculation of the predicted values of four pixels of Y 33 (1) through Y 33 (4) in the tutor image, which are enclosed by a quadrangle in  FIG. 85 , (in this case, the pixel of interest is X 33 ). 
   The corresponding pixel obtaining unit  733  obtains pixel values of the pixels in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel values which are to be predicted based upon the prediction tap and the class No., and supplies the prediction tap, the class No., and the obtained pixel values of the pixels in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel values which are to be predicted to a normal equation generating unit  734 . 
   For example, in the event of calculating the coefficients necessary for calculation of the predicted values of four pixels of Y 33 (1) through Y 33 (4) in the tutor image, the corresponding pixel obtaining unit  733  obtains the pixel values of the pixels, Y 33 (1) through Y 33 (4) as the pixels in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel values which are to be predicted. 
   The normal equation generating unit  734  generates normal equations for calculating a coefficient set which is used in the adaptation processing, corresponding to the correlation between the prediction tap and the pixel values which are to be predicted, based upon the prediction tap, the class No., and the obtained pixel values which are to be predicted, and supplies the generated normal equations to a coefficient calculation unit  735  along with the class No. 
   The coefficient calculation unit  735  calculates a coefficient set which is used in the adaptation processing, corresponding to the classified class, by solving the normal equations supplied from the normal equation generating unit  734 . The coefficient calculation unit  735  supplies the calculated coefficient set to the coefficient set memory  715  along with the class No. 
   An arrangement may be made wherein the normal equation generating unit  734  generates a matrix corresponding to such normal equations, and the coefficient calculation unit  735  calculates a coefficient set based upon the generated matrix. 
   Here, the adaptation processing will be described. 
   For example, let us now consider obtaining predicted value E[y] of the pixel value y in the tutor image from a linear one-dimensional combination model defined by linear combination of pixel values of several nearby pixels x 1 , x 2 , . . . (which will be referred to as student data as appropriate) and predetermined prediction coefficients w 1 , w 2 , . . . . In this case, the predicted value E[y] may be represented in the following Expression.
 
 E[y]=w   1   x   1   +w   2   x   2 +  (78)
 
   Accordingly, for generalization, upon defining the matrix W which consists of a set of the prediction coefficients w, the matrix X which consists of a set of the student data, and the matrix Y′ which consists of a set of the predicted values E[y] as 
                 X   =     [           x   11           x   12         …         x     1   ⁢   n                 x   21           x   22         …         x     2   ⁢   n               …       …       …       …             x     m   ⁢           ⁢   1             x     m   ⁢           ⁢   2           …         x     m   ⁢           ⁢   n             ]                   W   =     [           w   1               w   2             …             w   n           ]       ,                   Y   ′     =     [           E   ⁡     [     y   1     ]                 E   ⁡     [     y   2     ]               …             E   ⁡     [     y   m     ]             ]       ,               
the following observation expression holds.
 XW=Y′  (79) 
   Let us now consider obtaining the predicted value E[y] near the pixel value y of the original image by applying the least square method to the observation expression. In this case, upon defining the matrix Y which consists of a set of pixel values y in the original image (which will be referred to as tutor data as appropriate) and the matrix E which consists of a set of the residuals e of the predicted values E[y] with regard to the pixel values y in the original image as 
             E   =     (           e   1               e   2             …             e   m           )       ,     
     ⁢     Y   =     (           y   1               y   2             …             y   m           )       ,         
the following residual expression holds from Expression (79).
   XW=Y+E   (80) 
   In this case, the prediction coefficients w i  for obtaining the predicted value E[y] near the pixel value y in the original image can be obtained by minimizing the squared margin of error 
   
     
       
         
           
             ∑ 
             
               i 
               = 
               1 
             
             m 
           
           ⁢ 
           
               
           
           ⁢ 
           
             
               e 
               i 
               2 
             
             . 
           
         
       
     
   
   Accordingly, in a case that the derivative of the above-described squared margin of error from the prediction coefficient w i  is 0, that is to say, in a case that the prediction coefficient w i  satisfies the following expression, the prediction coefficient w i  is the optimal value for obtaining the predicted values E[y] near the pixel value y in the original image. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       e 
                       1 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           e 
                           1 
                         
                       
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           w 
                           i 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   + 
                   
                     
                       e 
                       2 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           e 
                           2 
                         
                       
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           w 
                           i 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   + 
                   … 
                   + 
                   
                     
                       e 
                       m 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           e 
                           m 
                         
                       
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           w 
                           i 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   0 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         1 
                       
                       , 
                       2 
                       , 
                       … 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       , 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       n 
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 81 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, the following expression holds by differentiating Expression (80) by the prediction coefficient w i . 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       ∂ 
                       
                         e 
                         i 
                       
                     
                     
                       ∂ 
                       
                         w 
                         1 
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   
                     x 
                     
                       i 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       1 
                     
                   
                 
                 , 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∂ 
                       
                         e 
                         i 
                       
                     
                     
                       ∂ 
                       
                         w 
                         2 
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   
                     x 
                     
                       i 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       2 
                     
                   
                 
                 , 
                 
                   
                     … 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           e 
                           i 
                         
                       
                       
                         ∂ 
                         
                           w 
                           n 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   
                     x 
                     in 
                   
                 
                 , 
                 
                   ( 
                   
                     
                       i 
                       = 
                       1 
                     
                     , 
                     2 
                     , 
                     … 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     , 
                     m 
                   
                   ) 
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 82 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Expression (83) is obtained from Expression (81) and Expression (82). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         1 
                       
                       m 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         e 
                         i 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         x 
                         
                           i 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           1 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   0 
                 
                 , 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         1 
                       
                       m 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         e 
                         i 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         x 
                         
                           i 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           2 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   0 
                 
                 , 
                 
                   
                     … 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       
                         ∑ 
                         
                           i 
                           = 
                           1 
                         
                         m 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         
                           e 
                           i 
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           x 
                           in 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   = 
                   0 
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 83 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Moreover, taking the relationship between the student data x, the prediction coefficient w, the tutor data y, and the residuals e in the residual expression (80), into consideration, the following normal equations can be obtained from Expression (83). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 { 
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               1 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               2 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           … 
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     in 
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               n 
                             
                           
                         
                         = 
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 1 
                               
                               m 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               
                                 x 
                                 
                                   i 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   1 
                                 
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                 y 
                                 i 
                               
                             
                           
                           ) 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               1 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               2 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           … 
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     in 
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               n 
                             
                           
                         
                         = 
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 1 
                               
                               m 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               
                                 x 
                                 
                                   i 
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   2 
                                 
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                 y 
                                 i 
                               
                             
                           
                           ) 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                   
                     
                       … 
                     
                   
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       n 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       1 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               1 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       n 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       2 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               2 
                             
                           
                           + 
                           … 
                           + 
                           
                             
                               ( 
                               
                                 
                                   ∑ 
                                   
                                     i 
                                     = 
                                     1 
                                   
                                   m 
                                 
                                 ⁢ 
                                 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       n 
                                     
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                     x 
                                     
                                       i 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       n 
                                     
                                   
                                 
                               
                               ) 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               w 
                               n 
                             
                           
                         
                         = 
                         
                           ( 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 1 
                               
                               m 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               
                                 x 
                                 in 
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                 y 
                                 i 
                               
                             
                           
                           ) 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 84 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   As many normal equations represented in Expression (84) can be formed as the number of the prediction coefficients w which are to be obtained, and accordingly the optimal prediction coefficients w can be obtained by solving Expression (84). Note that Expressions (84) can be solved by applying the sweeping method (Gauss-Jordan elimination), for example. 
   The adaptation processing consists of the optimal prediction coefficients w being obtained for each class, and the predicted values E[y] near the pixel values y in the tutor image being obtained by Expression (78) using the prediction coefficients w. 
   The normal equation generating unit  734  generates the normal equations for calculating the optimal prediction coefficients w for each class, and the coefficient calculation unit  735  calculates the prediction coefficients w based upon the generated normal equations. 
   Note that the adaptation processing is different from the interpolation processing with regard to the components which are not contained in the thinned out image and are contained in the original image being reproduced. That is to say, while in the event of taking only Expression (78) into consideration, the adaptation processing is the same as the interpolation processing using the interpolation filter, the prediction coefficients w corresponding to the tap coefficients of the interpolation filter is obtained by learning as if it were, using the tutor data y, and accordingly the adaptation processing can reproduce the components contained in the original image. Accordingly, it can be said that the adaptation processing acts to create an image, as if it were. 
     FIG. 89  is a diagram which describes a coefficient set generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 84 . The region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, and the uncovered background region in the input image. 
   The input image wherein the regions have been specified and the mixture ratio α has been detected by the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 , is separated into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, by the foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
   The separated image processing unit  106  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the image in the foreground region, a coefficient set corresponding to the image in the background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region individually, based upon the separated images, i.e., the image in the foreground region, image in the background region, foreground component image in the covered background region, background component image in the covered background region, foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and background component image in the uncovered background region. 
   That is to say, the learning unit  714 - 1  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the background region based upon the separated image in the background region, the learning unit  714 - 2  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region based upon the separated background component image in the uncovered background region, the learning unit  714 - 3  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region based upon the separated foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the learning unit  714 - 4  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region based upon the separated background component image in the covered background region, the learning unit  714 - 5  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region based upon the separated foreground component image in the covered background region, and the learning unit  714 - 6  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region based upon the separated image in the foreground region. 
   The coefficient set corresponding to the background region is used for prediction of the pixel value in the background region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. The coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region is used for prediction of the pixel value corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. The coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region is used for prediction of the pixel value corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. 
   The coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region is used for prediction of the pixel value corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. The coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region is used for prediction of the pixel value corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. 
   The coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region is used for prediction of the pixel value in the foreground region in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting pixel values. 
   The predicted image corresponding to the image in the background region, the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the predicted image corresponding to the image in the foreground region, are synthesized into a single predicted image. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 90 , description will be made with regard to the processing of learning for generating a coefficient set which is used for prediction of pixel values based upon the class classification adaptation processing by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 84 . 
   In Step S 701 , the weighted averaging units  707 - 1  through  707 - 6  generate a student images of the image in the background region, the image in the foreground region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, and the foreground component image in the covered background region. That is to say, the weighted averaging unit  707 - 1  generates a student image corresponding to the image in the background region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the image in the background region in the tutor image stored in the background region tutor image frame memory  701 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 2  generates a student image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 3  generates a student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 4  generates a student image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 5  generates a student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  707 - 6  generates a student image corresponding to the image in the foreground region in the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the image in the foreground region in the tutor image stored in the foreground region tutor image frame memory  706 , for example. 
   In Step S 702 , the learning unit  714 - 1  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background region based upon the image in the background region in the tutor image stored in the background region tutor image frame memory  701  and the student image corresponding to the image in the background region in the tutor image stored in the background region student image frame memory  708 . Details of the processing for generating of a coefficient set in Step S 702  will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91 . 
   In Step S 703 , the learning unit  714 - 2  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region based upon the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709 . 
   In Step S 704 , the learning unit  714 - 3  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region based upon the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region in the tutor image stored in the uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  710 . 
   In Step S 705 , the learning unit  714 - 4  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region based upon the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region background component student image frame memory  711 . 
   In Step S 706 , the learning unit  714 - 5  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region based upon the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region in the tutor image stored in the covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712 . 
   In Step S 707 , the learning unit  714 - 6  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region based upon the image in the foreground region in the tutor image stored in the foreground region tutor image frame memory  706  and the student image corresponding to the image in the foreground region in the tutor image stored in the foreground region student image frame memory  713 . 
   In Step S 708 , the learning units  714 - 1  through the learning unit  712 - 4  output a coefficient set corresponding to the background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, or a coefficient set corresponding to foreground region, to the coefficient set memory  715 , respectively. The coefficient set memory  715  stores the coefficient sets each of which corresponds to the background region, the foreground region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, and the foreground component image in the covered background region, and then the processing ends. 
   As described above, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 84  can generate a coefficient set corresponding to the image in the background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, and a coefficient set corresponding to the image in the foreground region. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 702  through Step S 707  may be performed serially or in parallel. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91 , the processing for generating of a coefficient set corresponding to the background region performed by the learning unit  714 - 1 , corresponding to the processing in Step S 702 , will now be described. 
   In Step S 721 , the learning unit  714 - 1  judges whether or not there are any unprocessed pixels in the student image corresponding to the background region, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the student image corresponding to the background region, the flow proceeds to Step S 722 , and the pixel of interest is obtained from the student image corresponding to the background region in raster scan sequence. 
   In Step S 723 , the class tap obtaining unit  751  of the class classification unit  731  obtains a class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the student image stored in the background region student image frame memory  708 . In Step S 724 , the waveform classification unit  752  of the class classification unit  731  applies the ADRC processing to the class tap, this reduces the number of bits of pixels making up the class tap, and the pixel of interest is classified. In Step S 725 , the prediction tap obtaining unit  732  obtains a prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the student image stored in the background region student image frame memory  708  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 726 , the corresponding pixel obtaining unit  733  obtains pixels corresponding to the pixel value which is to be predicted from the background region image of the tutor image stored in the background region tutor image frame memory  701  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 727 , the normal equation generating unit  734  adds the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted to the matrix for each class based upon the classified class, the flow returns to Step S 721 , and the separated image processing unit  106  repeats judgment whether or not unprocessed pixels exist. The prediction tap and the matrix for each class to which the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted is added, corresponds to the normal equations for calculating a coefficient set for each class. 
   In Step S 721 , in the event that judgment is made that there are no unprocessed pixels in the student image, the flow proceeds to Step S 728 , and the normal equation generating unit  734  supplies the matrix for each class for which the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted are set, to the coefficient calculation unit  735 . The coefficient calculation unit  735  calculates a coefficient set for each class corresponding to the background region by solving the matrix for each class, wherein the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted are set. 
   Note that the coefficient set is not restricted to predicting the pixel values by linear prediction, rather, an arrangement may be made wherein the coefficient calculation unit  735  calculates a coefficient set for predicting the pixel values by non-linear prediction. 
   In Step S 729 , the coefficient calculation unit  735  outputs the coefficient set for each class, corresponding to the background region to the coefficient set memory  715 , and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the learning unit  714 - 1  can generate a coefficient set corresponding to the background region. 
   The processing for generating the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region by the learning unit  714 - 2  corresponding to Step S 703  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91  except for using the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region background component tutor image frame memory  702  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region background component student image frame memory  709 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region by the learning unit  714 - 3  corresponding to Step S 704  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91  except for using the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  703  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region foreground component student image frame memory  710 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region by the learning unit  714 - 4  corresponding to Step S 705  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91  except for using the background component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region background component tutor image frame memory  704  and the student image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region background component student image frame memory  711 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region by the learning unit  714 - 5  corresponding to Step S 706  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91  except for using the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region foreground component tutor image frame memory  705  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region foreground component student image frame memory  712 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region by the learning unit  714 - 6  corresponding to Step S 707  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 91  except for using the image in the foreground region stored in the foreground region tutor image frame memory  706  and the student image corresponding to the image in the foreground region stored in the foreground region student image frame memory  713 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   As described above, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 84  can generate a coefficient set corresponding to the background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, and a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region, individually. 
     FIG. 92  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the separated image processing unit  106  for generating an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction by performing the class classification adaptation processing. For example, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92  generates an HD image by performing the class classification processing based upon the input image which is an SD image. 
   Background region frame memory  801  stores the image in the background region made up of pixels belonging to the background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The background region frame memory  801  supplies the stored image in the background region to a mapping unit  807 - 1 . 
   Uncovered background region background component image frame memory  802  stores the background component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region background component image frame memory  802  supplies the stored background component image in the uncovered background region to a mapping unit  807 - 2 . 
   Uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  803  stores the foreground component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  803  supplies the stored foreground component image in the uncovered background region to a mapping unit  807 - 3 . 
   Covered background region background component image frame memory  804  stores the background component image in the covered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region background component image frame memory  804  supplies the stored background component image in the covered background region to a mapping unit  807 - 4 . 
   Covered background region foreground component image frame memory  805  stores the foreground component image in the covered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region foreground component image frame memory  805  supplies the stored foreground component image in the covered background region to a mapping unit  807 - 5 . 
   Foreground region frame memory  806  stores the image in the foreground region made up of pixels belonging to the foreground region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The foreground region image frame memory  806  supplies the stored image in the foreground region to a mapping unit  807 - 6 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 1  generates a predicted image corresponding to the image in the background region stored in the background region frame memory  801  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background region stored in coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 1  supplies the generated predicted image to a synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 2  generates a predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region background component image frame memory  802  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 2  supplies the generated predicted image to the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 3  generates a predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  803  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 3  supplies the generated predicted image to the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 4  generates a predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region background component image frame memory  804  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 4  supplies the generated predicted image to the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 5  generates a predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region foreground component image frame memory  805  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 5  supplies the generated predicted image to the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The mapping unit  807 - 6  generates a predicted image corresponding to the image in the foreground region stored in the foreground region frame memory  806  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . The mapping unit  807 - 6  supplies the generated predicted image to the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   The synthesizing unit  809  synthesizes the predicted image corresponding to the image in the background region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 1 , the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 2 , the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 3 , the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 4 , the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 5 , and the predicted image corresponding to the image in the foreground region supplied from the mapping unit  807 - 6 , and supplies the synthesized predicted image to frame memory  810 . 
   The frame memory  810  stores the predicted image. supplied from the synthesizing unit  809 , and also outputs the stored image as an output image. 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate the mapping unit  807 - 1  through the mapping unit  807 - 6  individually, these will be simply referred to as the mapping unit  807 . 
     FIG. 93  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the mapping unit  807 . 
   The mapping processing unit  831  comprises a class classification unit  841  for performing the class classification processing, a prediction tap obtaining unit  842  for performing the adaptation processing, and a prediction computation unit  843 . 
   The class classification unit  841  comprises a class tap obtaining unit  851  and a waveform classification unit  852 , and classifies the pixel of interest in the separated input image which is one of the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, or the image in the foreground region. 
   The class tap obtaining unit  851  obtains a predetermined number of class taps corresponding to the pixel of interest of the separated input image, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  852 . For example, the class tap obtaining unit  851  obtains nine class taps, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  852 . 
   The waveform classification unit  852  reduces the number of bits of the pixels making up the class taps by applying the ADRC processing to the class taps, classifies the pixel of interest into one of the predetermined number of classes, and supplies the class No. corresponding to the classified class to the prediction tap obtaining unit  842 . For example, the waveform classification unit  852  classifies the pixel of interest to one of 512 classes, and supplies the class No. corresponding to the classified class to the prediction tap obtaining unit  842 . 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  842  obtains the predetermined number of prediction taps corresponding to the class from the separated input image which is one of the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, or the image in the foreground region, based upon the class No., and supplies the obtained class taps and class No. to the prediction computation unit  843 . 
   The prediction computation unit  843  obtains a coefficient set corresponding to the class and corresponding to the image which is to be predicted, from the coefficient sets corresponding to the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the foreground region, stored in the coefficient set memory  808 , based upon the class No. The prediction computation unit  843  predicts a pixel value in the predicted image by linear prediction based upon the coefficient set and the prediction taps corresponding to the class, and corresponding to the image which is to be predicted. The prediction computation unit  43  supplies the predicted pixel value to the frame memory  832 . 
   Note that an arrangement may be made wherein the prediction computation unit  843  predicts the pixel value in the predicted image by non-linear prediction. 
   The frame memory  832  stores the predicted pixel values supplied from the mapping processing unit  831 , and outputs the image made up of the predicted pixel values. 
   Referring to the images shown in  FIG. 94A  through  FIG. 99B , description will be made with regard to the results of the processing of the image processing device according to the present invention having the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 . 
   In the processing for generating results shown by way of examples, the sum of the number of classes in the class classification adaptation processing in the image processing device of the present invention is approximately the same as the number of classes in the conventional class classification adaptation processing. That is to say, the number of classes in the conventional class classification adaptation processing is 2048, and the number of the classes in the class classification adaptation processing in the image processing device of the present invention corresponding to the images in each region is arranged to be 512. 
   Also, the number of the prediction taps in the conventional class classification adaptation processing and the number of the prediction taps in the class classification adaptation processing for each region in the image processing device of the present invention, are 9, i.e., the same. 
   Referring to  FIG. 94A  through  FIG. 96B , the results of the prediction in the covered background region will be described. 
     FIG. 94A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the mixed region of the tutor image.  FIG. 94B  is a diagram which indicates the change in pixel value corresponding to the position in the spatial direction in the image in the mixed region of the tutor image. 
     FIG. 95A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the mixed region generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing corresponding to the tutor image illustrated in  FIG. 94A .  FIG. 95B  is a diagram which indicates the change in pixel value corresponding to the position in the spatial direction in the image in the mixed region, generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing, corresponding to the tutor image illustrated in  FIG. 94 . 
     FIG. 96A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the mixed region, generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 , corresponding to the tutor image shown in  FIG. 94A .  FIG. 95B  is a diagram which indicates the change in pixel value corresponding to the position in the spatial direction in the image in the mixed region, generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 , corresponding to the tutor image shown in  FIG. 94A . 
   The pixel values in the image in the mixed region, generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing, change in a stepped manner, as compared with the tutor image, and also are visually confirmed to change in a stepped manner in the actual generated image. 
   Conversely, the pixel values in the image in the mixed region, generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 , change more smoothly as compared with conventional arrangement, and indicates change even closer to the tutor image. Also, in the event of visually confirming the image generated by the separated image processing unit  106 , the image is confirmed to be an even smoother image as compared with conventional arrangement. 
   The image in the mixed region, generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 , changes more smoothly as compared with the image generated by the input image being divided into the foreground region, mixed region, or background region. 
   Referring to  FIG. 97A  through  FIG. 99B , description will be made with regard to the results of the prediction in the foreground region wherein the pixel values change generally linearly with regard to the pixel position. 
     FIG. 97A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the foreground region in the tutor image wherein the pixel values change generally linearly.  FIG. 97B  is a diagram which indicates change in pixel value corresponding to the position in the spatial direction in the image in the foreground region of the tutor image wherein the pixel values change generally linearly. 
     FIG. 98A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the foreground region, corresponding to the image shown in  FIG. 97A , generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing.  FIG. 98B  is a diagram which indicates the change in pixel value corresponding to the position in the spatial direction, in the image in the foreground region, corresponding to the image shown in  FIG. 97A , generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing. 
     FIG. 99A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the image in the foreground region corresponding to the image shown in  FIG. 97A , generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 .  FIG. 99B  is a diagram which indicates the change in pixel value, corresponding to the position in the spatial direction, in the image in the foreground region, corresponding to the image shown in  FIG. 97A , generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 . 
   The pixel values in the image in the foreground region generated by the conventional class classification adaptation processing change in a stepped manner as compared with the tutor image in the same manner as the mixed region, and the change in a stepped manner can be visually recognized in the actual image. 
   Conversely, the pixel values in the image in the foreground region generated by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 , change more smoothly as compared with conventional arrangement, and are extremely close to the values in the tutor image. In visual confirmation of the image generated by the separated image processing unit  106 , the difference between the image and the tutor image could not be observed. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 100 , description will now be made with regard to the processing for creation of an image by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92 . 
   In Step S 801 , the mapping unit  807 - 1  predicts an image corresponding to the image in the background region stored in the background region frame memory  801  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   Details of the processing for prediction of the image corresponding to the image in the background region will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101 . 
   In Step S 802 , the mapping unit  807 - 2  predicts an image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region background component image frame memory  802  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   In Step S 803 , the mapping unit  807 - 3  predicts an image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  803  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   In Step S 804 , the mapping unit  807 - 4  predicts an image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region background component image frame memory  804  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   In Step S 805 , the mapping unit  807 - 5  predicts an image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region foreground component image frame memory  805  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   In Step S 806 , the mapping unit  807 - 6  predicts an image corresponding to the image in the foreground region stored in the foreground region frame memory  806  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . 
   In Step S 807 , the synthesizing unit  809  synthesizes the predicted image corresponding to the image in the background region, the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the predicted image corresponding to the foreground region. The synthesizing unit  809  supplies the synthesized image to the frame memory  810 . The frame memory  810  stores the image supplied from the synthesizing unit  809 . 
   In Step S 808 , the frame memory  810  outputs the stored synthesized image, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the image processing device having the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92  can generate a predicted image for each of separated images, i.e., the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 801  through Step S 806  may be performed in serial manner, as well as in a parallel manner. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101 , the processing for prediction of the image corresponding to the background region by the mapping unit  807 - 1  corresponding to Step S 801  will be described. 
   In Step S 821 , the mapping unit  807 - 1  judges whether or not there are any unprocessed pixels in the background region, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the background region image, the flow proceeds to Step S 822 , and the mapping processing unit  831  obtains the coefficient set corresponding to the background region stored in the coefficient set memory  808 . In Step S 823 , the mapping processing unit  831  obtains a pixel of interest from the image of the background region stored in the background region frame memory  801  in raster scan sequence. 
   In Step S 824 , the class tap obtaining unit  851  of the class classification unit  841  obtains the class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the image in the background region stored in the background region frame memory  801 . In Step S 825 , the waveform classification unit  852  of the class classification unit  841  reduces the number of bits of pixels making up the class tap by applying the ADRC processing to the class tap, and performs class classification for the pixel of interest. In Step S 826 , the predication tap obtaining unit  842  obtains the prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the image in the background region stored in the background region frame memory  801  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 827 , the prediction computation unit  843  predicts pixel values of the predicted image by linear prediction based upon the coefficient set and the prediction tap, corresponding to the background region and the classified class. 
   Note that the prediction computation unit  843  may predict the pixel values of the predicted image by non-linear prediction, as well as by linear prediction. 
   In Step S 828 , the prediction computation unit  843  outputs the predicted pixel value to the frame memory  832 . The frame memory  832  stores the pixel value supplied from the prediction computation unit  843 . The procedure returns to Step S 821 , and judgment whether or not any unprocessed pixels exist is repeated. 
   In Step S 821 , in the event that judgment is made that there is no unprocessed pixel in the image in the background region, the flow proceeds to Step S 829 , the frame memory  832  outputs the stored predicted image corresponding to the image in the background region, and processing ends. 
   As described above, the mapping unit  807 - 1  can predict the image corresponding to the image in the background region based upon the image in the background region of the separated input image. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region by the mapping unit  807 - 2  corresponding to Step S 802  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101  except for using the background component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region background component image frame memory  802  and the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the uncovered background region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region by the mapping unit  807 - 3  corresponding to Step S 803  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101  except for using the foreground component image in the uncovered background region stored in the uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  803  and the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region by the mapping unit  807 - 4  corresponding to Step S 804  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101  except for using the background component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region background component image frame memory  804  and the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image in the covered background region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region by the mapping unit  807 - 5  corresponding to Step S 805  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101  except for using the foreground component image in the covered background region stored in the covered background region foreground component image frame memory  805  and the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image in the covered background region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the image in the foreground region by the mapping unit  807 - 6  corresponding to Step S 806  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 101  except for using the image in the foreground region stored in the foreground region frame memory  806  and the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground region, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   As described above, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 92  can generate a predicted image for each of images, i.e., the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, or the image in the foreground region. 
     FIG. 102  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the separated image processing unit  106  for applying the edge enhancement processing having different effects to each of images, i.e., the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, or the image in the foreground region. 
   Background region frame memory  901  stores the image in the background region made up of the pixels belonging to the background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The background region frame memory  901  supplies the stored image in the background region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 1 . 
   Uncovered background region background component image frame memory  902  stores the background component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region background component image frame memory  902  supplies the stored background component image in the uncovered background region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 2 . 
   Uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  903  stores the foreground component image in the uncovered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  903  supplies the stored foreground component image in the uncovered background region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 3 . 
   Covered background region background component image frame memory  904  stores the background component image in the covered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region background component image frame memory  904  supplies the stored background component image in the covered background region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 4 . 
   Covered background region foreground component image frame memory  905  stores the foreground component image in the covered background region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The covered background region foreground component image frame memory  905  supplies the stored foreground component image in the covered background region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 5 . 
   Foreground region frame memory  906  stores the image in the foreground region made up of the pixels belonging to the foreground region supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  105 . The foreground region frame memory  906  supplies the stored image in the foreground region to an edge enhancing unit  907 - 6 . 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  supplies the image in the background region, which has been subjected to edge enhancement by applying the edge enhancement processing suitable for the image in the background region, to the image in the background region stored in the background region frame memory  901 , to a synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  performs the edge enhancement processing which further enhances edges for the image in the background region which is the still image, as compared with the foreground region. Thus the sense-of-resolution of the image in the background region can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 2  applies the edge enhancement processing suitable for the background component image in the uncovered background region, to the image stored in the uncovered background region background component image frame memory  902 , and supplies the image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 2  performs the edge enhancement processing which further enhances edges for the background component image in the uncovered background region which is the still image, as compared with the foreground region. Thus the sense-of-resolution of the image in the background region can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 3  applies edge enhancement processing suitable to the foreground component image of the uncovered background region, to the image stored in the uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  903 , and supplies the image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 3  performs the processing of edge enhancement, which enhances the edge for the foreground component image of the covered background region made up of moving foreground components less than as compared with the background region. Thus, the sense-of-resolution of the foreground component image of the covered background region can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 4  applies edge enhancement processing suitable to the background component image of the covered background region, to the image stored in the covered background region background component image frame memory  904 , and supplies the image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 4  performs the processing of edge enhancement, which further enhances the edge for the background component image of the covered background region which is a still image, as compared with the foreground region. Thus, the sense-of-resolution of the background region image can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 5  applies edge enhancement processing suitable to the foreground component image of the covered background region, to the image stored in the covered background region foreground component image frame memory  905 , and supplies the image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 5  performs the processing of edge enhancement, which enhances the edge for the foreground component image of the covered background region made up of moving foreground components less than as compared with the background region. Thus, the sense-of-resolution of the foreground region image of the covered background region can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  applies edge enhancement processing suitable to the foreground region image, to the foreground region image stored in the foreground region frame memory  906 , and supplies the foreground region image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  performs the processing of edge enhancement, which enhances the edge of the moving foreground region image less than as compared with the background region. Thus, the sense-of-resolution of the foreground region image can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to a moving image. 
   The synthesizing unit  908  synthesizes the background region image subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1 , the background component image of the uncovered background region subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 2 , the foreground component image of the uncovered background region subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 3 , the background component image of the covered background region subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 4 , the foreground component image of the covered background region subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 5 , and the foreground region image subjected to edge enhancing that has been supplied from the edge enhancing unit  907 - 6 , and supplies the synthesized image to the frame memory  909 . 
   The frame memory  909  stores the synthesized image supplied from the synthesizing unit  908 , and also outputs the stored image as an output image. 
   Thus, the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 74  applies edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of each image of each of regions, i.e., the background region, uncovered background region, covered background region, or the foreground region, so the sense-of-resolution of the image can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring. 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate the edge enhancing units  907 - 1  through  907 - 6 , these will be simply referred to as the edge enhancing unit  907 . 
     FIG. 103  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the edge enhancing unit  907 . The separated input image is input to a high pass filter  921  and an addition unit  923 . 
   The high pass filter  921  extracts the components wherein the pixel value changes drastically with regard to pixel position, i.e., the high image frequency components from the input image based upon the input filter coefficients, and removes the components wherein the change of the pixel value is small with regard to the pixel position, i.e., the low image frequency components, and generates an edge image. 
   For example, in the event of inputting the image shown in  FIG. 104A , the high pass filter  921  generates the edge image shown in  FIG. 104B . 
   In the event that the input filter coefficients change, the high pass filter  921  changes the image frequencies which are to be extracted, the image frequencies which are to be removed, and the gain for the image which is to be extracted. 
   Referring to  FIG. 105  through  FIG. 108 , the relationship between the filter coefficients and the edge image will be described. 
     FIG. 105  is a diagram which illustrates the first example of the filter coefficients. In  FIG. 105 , E indicates the exponent of 10. For example, E- 04  indicates 10 −4 , and E- 02  indicates 10 −2 . 
   For example, the high pass filter  921  multiplies each of pixel values, i.e., the pixel value of the pixel of interest, the pixel values of the pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in a predetermined direction in the spatial direction Y, and the pixel values of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in another direction in the spatial direction Y, by the corresponding coefficient of the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 . The high pass filter  921  calculates the sum of the results obtained by multiplying each pixel value of the pixels by the coefficient corresponding thereto, and sets the calculated sum for the pixel value of the pixel of interest. 
   For example, in the event of using the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 , the high pass filter  921  multiplies the pixel value of the pixel of interest by 1.2169396, multiplies the pixel value of the pixel distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel in the upper direction in the screen by −0.52530356, and multiplies the pixel value of the pixel distanced from the pixel of interest by 2 pixels in the upper direction in the screen by −0.22739914. 
   In the same way, in the event of using the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 , the high pass filter  921  multiplies each of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 3 pixels to 13 pixels in the upper direction in the screen by the corresponding coefficient, multiplies the pixel value of the pixel distanced from the pixel of interest by 14 pixels in the upper direction in the screen by −0.00022540586, and multiplies the pixel value of the pixel distanced from the pixel of interest by 15 pixels in the upper direction in the screen by −0.00039273163. 
   In the event of using the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 , in the same way, the high pass filter  921  multiplies each of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in the bottom direction in the screen by the corresponding coefficient. 
   The high pass filter  921  calculates the sum of results obtained by multiplying the pixel value of the pixel of interest, each pixel value of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in the top direction in the screen, and each pixel value of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in the bottom direction in the screen, by the corresponding coefficient. The high pass filter  921  sets the calculated sum to the pixel value of the pixel of interest. 
   The high pass filter  921  moves the position of the pixel of interest in sequence in the spatial direction X, repeats the above-described processing, and calculates pixel values for the entire screen. 
   The high pass filter  921  then multiplies the pixel value of the interest, each pixel value of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in a predetermined direction in the spatial direction X, and each pixel value of pixels distanced from the pixel of interest by 1 pixel to 15 pixels in another direction in the spatial direction X, in the image of which pixel values are calculated based upon the coefficients described above, by the corresponding coefficient of the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 . The high pass filter  921  calculates the sum of the results obtained by multiplying each pixel value of pixels by the corresponding coefficient, and sets the calculated sum to the pixel value of the pixel of interest. 
   The high pass filter  921  moves the position of the pixel of interest in sequence in the spatial direction Y, repeats the above-described processing, and calculates pixel values of pixels for the entire image. 
   That is to say, in this case, the high pass filter  921  is a so-called one-dimensional filter using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 . 
     FIG. 106  is a diagram which illustrates the operation of the high pass filter  921  in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 . As shown in  FIG. 106 , the maximum gain for the extracted image component at the high pass filter  921  is 1 in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 . 
     FIG. 107  is a diagram which illustrates the second example of the filter coefficients. 
     FIG. 108  is a diagram which illustrates the operation of the high pass filter  921  in the event that the same processing as the processing using the filter coefficients shown in  FIG. 105 , is performed using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 107 . As shown in  FIG. 108 , in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 107 , the maximum gain for extracted image component at the high pass filter  921  is 1.5. 
   As described above, the high pass filter  921  changes the gain for the extracted image component by the supplied filter coefficients. 
   While examples are not shown here, in the event of supplying different filter coefficients, the high pass filter  921  can change the extracted image frequencies and the removed image frequencies in the same way. 
   Returning to  FIG. 103 , the high pass filter  921  supplies the generated edge image to a gain adjustment unit  922 . 
   The gain adjustment unit  922  amplifies or decays the edge image supplied from the high pass filter  921  based upon the input gain adjustment coefficients. In the event that the input gain adjustment coefficient is altered, the gain adjustment unit  922  changes the amplification ratio (or decay ratio) of the edge image. For example, in the event of inputting the gain adjustment coefficients designating an amplification ratio which is equal to or more than 1, the gain adjustment unit  922  amplifies the edge image, and in the event of inputting the gain adjustment coefficients designating the amplification ratio which is less than 1, the gain adjustment unit  922  decays the edge image. 
   The gain adjustment unit  922  supplies the edge image, which has been subjected to gain adjustment, to the addition unit  923 . 
   The addition unit  923  adds the divided input image and the edge image which has been subjected to gain adjustment supplied from the gain adjustment unit  922 , and outputs the added image. 
   For example, in the event of inputting the input image shown in  FIG. 104A , and supplying the edge image shown in  FIG. 104B  from the high pass filter  921 , the addition unit  923  adds the input image shown in  FIG. 104A  and the edge image shown in  FIG. 104B , and outputs the image shown in  FIG. 104C . 
   As described above, the edge enhancing unit  907  applies the edge enhancement processing for the divided image. 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 103  applies the edge enhancement processing of which degree is even higher, to the image in the background region using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 107 . The edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 103  applies the edge enhancement processing of which degree is relatively lower, to the image in the foreground region using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 105   
     FIG. 109  is a block diagram which illustrates another configuration of the edge enhancing unit  907 . In the example shown in  FIG. 109 , the edge enhancing unit  907  comprises a filter  941 . 
   The filter  941  generates an edge enhancement image by amplifying the components wherein the pixel value changes drastically with regard to the pixel position, i.e., the high image frequency components in the input image, based upon the input filter coefficients. 
   For example, in the event of supplying the coefficients shown by way of an example in  FIG. 110 , the filter  941  performs the same processing as the processing described with regard to the high pass filter  921 , based upon the coefficients shown by way of an example in  FIG. 110 . 
     FIG. 111  is a diagram which illustrates the operation of the filter  941  in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 110 . As described in  FIG. 111 , in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 110 , the filter  941  amplifies the high image frequency components to double, passes the low image frequency components as they are, and generates an edge enhancement image. 
   In the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 110 , the filter  941  outputs the same output image as the output image from the edge enhancing unit  907  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 103  wherein that the coefficients shown in  FIG. 105  are used and the gain at the gain adjustment unit  922  is 1. 
     FIG. 112  is a diagram which illustrates the second example of the filter coefficients supplied to the filter  941 . 
     FIG. 113  is a diagram which illustrates the operation of the filter  941  in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 112 . As shown in  FIG. 113 , in the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 112 , the filter  941  amplifies the high image frequency components to 2.5 times, allows the low image frequency components to pass as they are, and generates an edge enhancement image. 
   In the event of using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 112 , the filter  941  outputs the same output image as the output image from the edge enhancing unit  907  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 103  in the event that the coefficients shown in  FIG. 107  are used and the gain of the gain adjustment unit  922  is 1. 
   As described above, the edge enhancing unit  907  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 109  can change the degree of edge enhancement in the image by altering the gain of the high frequency components in the image, by the input filter coefficients. 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 109  applies the edge enhancement processing of which degree is even higher, using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 112 , to the image in the background region. The edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 109  applies the edge enhancement processing of which degree is relatively lower, using the coefficients shown in  FIG. 110 , to the image in the foreground region. 
   As described above, the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  through the edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  perform edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the divided image based upon different filter coefficients or different gain adjustment coefficients, for example. 
     FIG. 114  is a diagram which describes the processing of the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 102 . 
   The foreground region, uncovered background region, covered background region, and background region, in the input image are specified by the region specifying unit  103 . The input image wherein regions are specified is separated into the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, by the foreground/background separation unit  105 . 
   The separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 102  performs edge enhancement processing for each of the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, corresponding to the nature of each image. 
   The image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, each of which has been subjected to edge enhancement, are synthesized. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 115 , the processing for edge enhancement by the separated image processing unit  106  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 102  will now be described. 
   In Step S 901 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 1  performs edge enhancement of the background region image stored in the background region frame memory  901 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the background region image. 
   In Step S 902 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 2  performs edge enhancement of the background component image of the uncovered background region, stored in the uncovered background region background component image frame memory  902 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the background component image of the uncovered background region. 
   In Step S 903 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 3  performs edge enhancement of the foreground component image of the uncovered background region, stored in the uncovered background region foreground component image frame memory  903 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the foreground component image of the uncovered background region. 
   In Step S 904 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 4  performs edge enhancement of the background component image of the covered background region, stored in the covered background region background component image frame memory  904 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the background component image of the covered background region. 
   In Step S 905 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 5  performs edge enhancement of the foreground component image of the covered background region, stored in the covered background region foreground component image frame memory  905 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the foreground component image of the covered background region. 
   In Step S 906 , the edge enhancing unit  907 - 6  performs edge enhancement of the foreground region image stored in the foreground region frame memory  906 , by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the foreground region image. 
   In Step S 907 , the synthesizing unit  908  synthesizes the foreground region image, background region image, foreground component image of the covered background region, background component image of the covered background region, foreground component image of the uncovered background region, and background component image of the uncovered background region, regarding which each has been subjected to edge enhancement. The synthesizing unit  908  supplies the synthesized image to the frame memory  909 . The frame memory  909  stores the image supplied from the synthesizing unit  908 . 
   In Step S 908 , the frame memory  909  outputs the synthesized image stored therein, and the processing ends. 
   Thus, the separated image processing unit  106  of which the configuration shown in  FIG. 102  can execute edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of each of the foreground region image, background region image, foreground component image of the covered background region, background component image of the covered background region, foreground component image of the uncovered background region, and background component image of the uncovered background region, so the sense-of-resolution can be improved without causing unnatural distortion in moving images. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 901  through Step S 906  can be performed in a serial manner or in a parallel manner. 
   Also, the processing performed by the separated image processing unit  106  is not restricted to the generating of the coefficients corresponding to an SD image and an HD image, or the processing for generating of an HD image from an SD image, an arrangement may be made wherein an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction is generated by generating the coefficients for generating an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction, for example. Moreover, an arrangement may be made wherein the separated image processing unit  106  performs the processing for generating an even higher resolution image in the time direction. 
   Note that an arrangement may be made wherein the separated image processing unit  106  performs other processing, e.g., image size conversion into a desired size, extracting of color signals such as RGB, removal of noise, image compression, encoding, or the like, as well as the processing for creation of resolution by the class classification adaptation processing, or edge enhancement processing, for each image of the specified region. For example, the compression ratio can be increased with little deterioration of the image over conventional arrangements by the separated image processing unit  106  compressing images of each of the regions with low compression ratio in directions following movement vectors and high compression ratio in directions orthogonal to movement vectors, based on movement vectors corresponding to images of each of the regions. 
     FIG. 116  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the functions of the image processing device for separating an input image and processing each separated image. While the image processing device shown in  FIG. 11  performs region specification and calculation of the mixture ratio α serially, the image processing device shown in  FIG. 116  performs region specification and calculation of the mixture ratio α in parallel. 
   The same portions as the functions shown in the block diagram in  FIG. 11  are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   The input image is supplied to the object extracting unit  101 , region specifying unit  103 , mixture ratio calculating unit  1101 , and foreground/background separation unit  1102 . 
   Based on an input image, the mixture ratio calculating unit  1101  calculates an estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein a pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region, and an estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, for each of the pixels contained in the input image, and supplies the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region and the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, thus calculated, to the foreground/background separation unit  1102 . 
     FIG. 117  is a block diagram which illustrates one example of the configuration of the mixture ratio calculation unit  1101 . 
   The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  shown in  FIG. 117  is the same as the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  shown in  FIG. 59 . The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  shown in  FIG. 117  is the same as the estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  shown in  FIG. 59 . 
   The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  401  calculates the estimated mixture ratio for each pixel by the computation corresponding to the model of the covered background region based upon the input image, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio. 
   The estimated mixture ratio processing unit  402  calculates the estimated mixture ratio for each pixel by the computation corresponding to the model of the uncovered background region based upon the input image, and outputs the calculated estimated mixture ratio. 
   Based on the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region and the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  1101 , and the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , the foreground/background separation unit  1102  separates the input image into a foreground region image, background region image, foreground component image of the covered background region, background component image of the covered background region, foreground component image of the uncovered background region, and background component image of the uncovered background region, and supplies the separated images to the separated image processing unit  106 . 
     FIG. 118  is a block diagram which illustrates one example of the configuration of the foreground/background separation unit  1102 . 
   The same portions as the foreground/background separation unit  105  shown in  FIG. 77  are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   A selection unit  1121  selects either of the estimated mixture ratio wherein an assumption is made that the pixel belongs to the covered background region, or the estimated mixture ratio wherein an assumption is made that the pixel belongs to the uncovered background region, supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  1101  based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , and supplies the selected estimated mixture ratio as a mixture ratio α to the separation unit  601 . 
   The separation unit  601  extracts the foreground components and the background components from the pixel values of the pixels belonging to the mixed region based upon the mixture ratio α supplied from the selection unit  1121  and the region information, and separates into the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, and the foreground component image in the covered background region. 
   The configuration of the separation unit  601  may be the same as the configuration shown in  FIG. 82 . 
   As described above, the image processing device of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 116  can perform processing for each of images, i.e., the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, corresponding to the nature of each image. 
   As described above, the image processing device of the present invention separates the input image into the image in the background region, the background component image in the uncovered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, and the image in the foreground region, and performs processing suitable to each of separated images, and accordingly, generates an even higher resolution image, for example. 
     FIG. 119  is a block diagram which illustrates another configuration of the image processing device. 
   The same portions as shown in  FIG. 11  are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   The input image supplied to the image processing device is supplied to the object extracting unit  101 , the region specifying unit  103 , the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 , and the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
   The foreground/background separating unit  2001  separates the input images into foreground component images which consist of only the foreground components corresponding to the foreground object and background component images which consist of only the background components based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 , supplies the foreground component image to the movement blurring removal unit  2002 , and supplies the background component image to a correction unit  2003 . 
   The movement blurring removal unit  2002  decides the increment of processing, which indicates one or more pixels included in the foreground component images, based upon the movement amount v which is led from the movement vector, and the region information. An increment of processing is the data which designates one group of the pixels which are the object for adjustment processing for the movement blurring amount. 
   The movement blurring removal unit  2002  removes movement blurring contained in the foreground component image based upon the foreground component image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  2001 , the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 , and the processing increment, and outputs the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, to a movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
   The correction unit  2003  corrects the pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image. The pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image is calculated by subtracting the foreground component from the pixel value of a pixel in the mixed region prior to separation. Accordingly, the pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image decreases corresponding to the mixture ratio α, as compared to the pixel value of a pixel in the adjacent background region. 
   The correction unit  2003  corrects the decrease of the gain corresponding to the mixture ratio α of the pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image, as described above, and supplies the corrected background component image to the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004 . 
   The movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  individually performs processing for the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring and the corrected background component image. 
   For example, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  generates coefficients which are used in the classifying adaptation processing for generating an even higher resolution image, for each foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, and for each corrected background component image. 
   For example, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  creates an even higher resolution image by applying the classifying adaptation processing to each foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, and for each corrected background component image. 
   Also, for example, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  applies edge enhancement processing of which degree is different using different coefficients for each of images, i.e., the foreground component image subjected to removal of movement blurring, and the background component image subjected to correction. 
     FIG. 120  is a diagram which illustrates the correspondence of the image divided into pixels each of which belongs to the foreground region, background region, covered background region, or uncovered background region, to a model diagram wherein the pixel values of pixels develop over the time direction. 
   As shown in  FIG. 120 , the region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, background region, covered background region, and uncovered background region, of the input image. 
   As shown in  FIG. 121 , the separated background component image is corrected for the pixel values of the mixed region, and the separated foreground component image is subjected to removal of movement blurring. 
   As shown in  FIG. 122 , the input image is divided into regions, and is separated into foreground components and background components. The separated input image is synthesized into the background component image and the foreground component image. Movement blurring contained in the foreground component image is removed. The background component image is corrected with regard to the pixel values corresponding to the mixed region. 
   The foreground component image subjected to removal of movement blurring and the background component image subjected to correction are individually processed. 
     FIG. 123  is a flowchart which describes the image processing of the image processing device according to the present invention. 
   In Step S 2001 , the region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, background region, covered background region, and uncovered background region, in the input image based upon the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102  and the input image. The processing of region specification in Step S 2001  is the same as the processing shown in Step S 101 , so detailed description of the processing will be omitted. 
   In Step S 2002 , the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  calculates the mixture ratio α based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the input image. The processing for calculation of the mixture ratio α in Step S 2002  is the same as the processing in Step S 102 , so detailed description of the processing will be omitted. 
   In Step S 2003 , the foreground/background separation unit  2001  separates the input image into the image in the foreground region, the image in the background region, the foreground component image in the covered background region, the background component image in the covered background region, the foreground component image in the uncovered background region, and the background component image in the uncovered background region, based upon the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  and the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 . Details of the processing for separation of the image by the foreground/background separation unit  2001  will be described later. 
   In Step S 2004 , the movement blurring removal unit  2002  removes movement blurring from the foreground component image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  2001 , based upon the movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102  and the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 . 
   Details of the processing for removal of movement blurring by the movement blurring removal unit  2002  will be described later. 
   In Step S 2005 , the correction unit  2003  corrects the pixel values corresponding to the mixed region of the background component image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
   In Step S 2006 , the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  performs image processing for each foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring and each background component image which has been corrected, and the processing ends. Details of the image processing performed by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  will be described later. 
   As described above, the image processing device according to the present invention separates the input image into the foreground component image and the background component image, removes movement blurring from the foreground component image, and performs image processing for each of the foreground component image subjected to removal of movement blurring, and the background component image. 
   A description will now be made with regard to the foreground/background separation unit  2001 .  FIG. 124  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . The input image supplied to the foreground/background separation unit  2001  is supplied to a separation unit  2601 , a switch  2602 , and a switch  2604 . The region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , which indicates the covered background region and the uncovered background region, is supplied to the separation unit  2601 . The region information which indicates the foreground region is supplied to the switch  2602 . The region information which indicates the background region is supplied to the switch  2604 . 
   The mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculation unit  104  is supplied to the separation unit  2601 . 
   The separation unit  2601  separates the foreground components from the input image based upon the region information indicating the covered background region, the region information indicating the uncovered background region, and the mixture ratio α, and supplies the separated foreground components to a synthesizing unit  2603 , as well as separating the background components from the input image, and supplying the separated background components to the synthesizing unit  2605 . 
   In the event that the pixel corresponding to the foreground is input, the switch  2602  is closed based upon the region information indicating the foreground region, and supplies only the pixels corresponding to the foreground included in the input image to the synthesizing unit  2603 . 
   In the event that the pixel corresponding to the background is input, the switch  2604  is closed based upon the region information indicating the background region, and supplies only the pixels corresponding to the background included in the input image to the synthesizing unit  2605 . 
   The synthesizing unit  2603  synthesizes the foreground component image based upon the components corresponding to the foreground supplied from the separation unit  2601 , and the pixels corresponding to the foreground supplied from the switch  2602 , and outputs the synthesized foreground component image. Since the foreground region and the mixed region are not overlapped, the synthesizing unit  2603  synthesizes the foreground component image, for example, by applying the logical sum computation to the components corresponding to the foreground, and the pixels corresponding to the foreground. 
   In the initialization processing which is performed in the first stage of the foreground component image synthesizing processing, the synthesizing unit  2603  stores the image, wherein all the pixel values are 0, in built-in frame memory, and in the foreground component image synthesizing processing, the synthesizing unit  2603  stores (or overwrites) the foreground component image. Accordingly, the pixel corresponding to the background region, which is the foreground component image output from the synthesizing unit  2603 , stores 0 as a pixel value. 
   The synthesizing unit  2605  synthesizes the background component image based upon the components corresponding to the background supplied from the separation unit  2601 , and the pixels corresponding to the background supplied from the switch  2604 , and outputs the synthesized background component image. Since the background region and the mixed region are not overlapped, the synthesizing unit  2605  synthesizes the background component image, for example, by applying the logical sum computation to the components corresponding to the background, and the pixels corresponding to the background. 
   In the initialization processing which is performed in the first stage of the background component image synthesizing processing, the synthesizing unit  2605  stores the image, wherein all the pixel values are 0, in built-in frame memory, and in the background component image synthesizing processing, the synthesizing unit  2605  stores (or overwrites) the background component image. Accordingly, the pixel corresponding to the foreground region, which is the background component image output from the synthesizing unit  2605 , stores 0 as a pixel value. 
     FIG. 125A  and  FIG. 125B  are diagrams which illustrate the input image input to the foreground/background separation unit  2001 , and the foreground component image and the background component image output from the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
     FIG. 125A  is a schematic diagram which illustrates the displayed image, and  FIG. 125B  is a model diagram wherein one line of pixels including pixels belonging to the foreground region, pixels belonging to the background region, and pixels belonging to the mixed region, corresponding to  FIG. 125A , develop over the time direction. 
   As shown in  FIG. 125A  and  FIG. 125B , the background component image output from the foreground/background separation unit  2001  is made up of pixels belonging to the background region and background components contained in pixels in the mixed region. 
   As shown in  FIG. 125A  and  FIG. 125B , the foreground component image output from the foreground/background separation unit  2001  is made up of pixels belonging to the foreground region and foreground components contained in pixels in the mixed region. 
   The pixel value of the pixel in the mixed region is separated into the background components and the foreground components by the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . The separated background components make up a background component image along with pixels belonging to the background region. The separated foreground components make up a foreground component image along with pixels belonging to the foreground region. 
   As described above, in the foreground component image, the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the background region are set to 0, and the pixels corresponding to the foreground region and the pixels corresponding to the mixed region are set to valid pixel values. Similarly, in the background component image, the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the foreground region are set to 0, and the pixels corresponding to the background region and the pixels corresponding to the mixed region are set to valid pixel values. 
   A description will now be made regarding the separation processing of the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region performed by the separation unit  2601 . 
     FIG. 126  is a model of an image which indicates two frames of the foreground components and the background components, including the foreground corresponding to the object which moves from the left to the right in the drawing. In the model of the image shown in  FIG. 126 , the movement amount v of the foreground is 4, and the virtual dividing number is 4. 
   In the frame #n, the left-most pixel and the fourteenth through eighteenth pixels from the left are made up of only the background components, and belong to the background region. In the frame #n, the second through fourth pixels from the left are made up of the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the uncovered background region. In the frame #n, the eleventh through thirteenth pixels from the left are made up of the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the covered background region. In the frame #n, the fifth through tenth pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components, and belong to the foreground region. 
   In the frame #n+1, the first through fifth pixels from the left and the eighteenth pixel from the left are made up of only the background components, and belong to the background region. In the frame #n+1, the sixth through eighth pixels from the left contain the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the uncovered background region. In the frame #n+1, the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left contain the background components and the foreground components, and belong to the covered background region. In the frame #n+1, the ninth through fourteen pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components, and belong to the foreground region. 
     FIG. 127  is a diagram which describes the processing for separation of the foreground components from the pixel belonging to the covered background region. In  FIG. 127 , α 1  through α 18  are the mixture ratios corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, respectively. In  FIG. 127 , the fifteenth through seventeenth pixels from the left belongs to the covered background region. 
   The pixel value C 15  of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (85). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         C 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         15 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             15 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             B 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             P 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 85 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, α 15  denotes the mixture ratio of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n. P 15  denotes the pixel value of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n−1. 
   The sum f 15  of the foreground components of the fifteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (86) based upon Expression (85). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         f 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         15 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             09 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             08 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             07 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           C 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                         - 
                         
                           
                             α15 
                             · 
                             P 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           15 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 86 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Similarly, the sum f 16  of the foreground components of the sixteenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (87), and the sum f 17  of the foreground components of the seventeenth pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (88).
 
 f 16= C 16−α16· P 16  (87)
 
 f 17= C 17−α17· P 17  (88)
 
   As described above, the foreground component fc contained in the pixel value C of the pixel belonging to the covered background region is calculated by Expression (89).
 
 fc=C−α·P   (89)
 
   P denotes the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the previous frame. 
     FIG. 128  is a diagram which describes the processing for separating the foreground components from the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region. In  FIG. 128 , α 1  through α 18  denote the mixture ratio corresponding to the pixels in the frame #n, respectively. In  FIG. 128 , the second through fourth pixels from the left belong to the uncovered background region. 
   The pixel value C 02  of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n is represented in Expression (90). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         C 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         02 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           B 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             02 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             B 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             N 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         + 
                         
                           F 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             01 
                             / 
                             v 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 90 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Here, α 2  denotes the mixture ratio of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n. N 02  denotes the pixel value of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n+1. 
   The foreground component sum of the second pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 02 , is represented in Expression (91) based upon Expression (90). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         f 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         02 
                       
                       = 
                       
                         F 
                         ⁢ 
                         
                             
                         
                         ⁢ 
                         
                           01 
                           / 
                           v 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         
                           C 
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                         - 
                         
                           
                             α2 
                             · 
                             N 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           02 
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 91 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Similarly, the foreground component sum of the third pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 03 , is represented in Expression (92), and the foreground component sum of the fourth pixel from the left in the frame #n, f 04 , is represented in Expression (93).
 
 f 03= C 03−α3· N 03  (92)
 
 f 04= C 04−α4· N 04  (93)
 
   As described above, the foreground component fu contained in the pixel value C of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region is calculated by Expression (94).
 
 fu=C−α·N   (94)
 
   N denotes the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the following frame. 
   As described above, the separation unit  2601  can separate the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region based upon the information indicating the covered background region and the information indicating the uncovered background region, which is included in the region information, and the mixture ratio α for each pixel. 
     FIG. 129  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the separation unit  2601  for performing the processing described above. The image input to the separation unit  2601  is supplied to frame memory  2621 , and the region information indicating the covered background region and the uncovered background region and the mixture ratio α, supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 , are input to a separation processing block  2622 . 
   The frame memory  2621  stores the input image in increments of frames. In the event that the frame #n is the object of processing, the frame memory  2621  stores the frame #n−1 which is the frame previous to the frame #n, frame #n, and the frame #n+1 which is the frame following the frame #n. 
   The frame memory  2621  supplies the corresponding pixels in the frame #n−1, the frame #n, and the frame #n+1 to the separation processing block  2622 . 
   The separation processing block  2622  separates the foreground components and the background components from the pixel belonging to the mixed region in the frame #n by applying the computation described with reference to  FIG. 127  and  FIG. 128  to the pixel values of corresponding pixels in the frame #n−1, the frame #n, and the frame #n+1, supplied from the frame memory  2621 , based upon the region information indicating the covered background region and the uncovered background region, and the mixture ratio α, and supplies to the frame memory  2623 . 
   The separation processing block  2622  comprises an uncovered region processing unit  2631 , a covered region processing unit  2632 , a synthesizing unit  2633 , and a synthesizing unit  2634 . 
   A multiplication device  2641  of the uncovered region processing unit  2631  multiplies the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n+1 supplied from the frame memory  2621  by the mixture ratio α, and outputs to a switch  2642 . In the event that the pixel in the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  2621  (which is corresponding to the pixel of the frame #n+1) belongs to the uncovered background region, the switch  2642  is closed, and the pixel value which has been multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the multiplication device  2641  is supplied to a computing device  2643  and the synthesizing unit  2634 . The value wherein the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n+1 output from the switch  2642  is multiplied by the mixture ratio α is the same as the background component of the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the frame #n. 
   The computing device  2643  obtains the foreground components by subtracting the background components supplied from the switch  2642  from the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  2621 . The computing device  2643  supplies the foreground components of the pixel in the frame #n belonging to the uncovered background region, to the synthesizing unit  2633 . 
   A multiplication device  2651  of the covered region processing unit  2632  multiplies the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n−1 supplied from the frame memory  2621  by the mixture ratio α, and outputs to a switch  2652 . In the event that the pixel in the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  2621  (corresponding to the pixel of the frame #n−1) belongs to the covered background region, the switch  2652  is closed, and the pixel value which has been multiplied by the mixture ratio α supplied from the multiplication device  2651  is supplied to a computing device  2653  and the synthesizing unit  2634 . The value wherein the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n−1 has been multiplied by the mixture ratio α, which is output from the switch  2652 , is the same as the background component of the pixel value of the corresponding pixel in the frame #n. 
   The computing device  2653  obtains the foreground components by subtracting the background components supplied from the switch  2652  from the pixel value of the pixel of the frame #n supplied from the frame memory  2621 . The computing device  2653  supplies the foreground components of the pixel in the frame #n belonging to the covered background region, to the synthesizing unit  2633 . 
   The synthesizing unit  2633  synthesizes the foreground components of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the computing device  2643 , and the foreground components of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the computing device  2653 , in the frame #n, and supplies to the frame memory  2623 . 
   The synthesizing unit  2634  synthesizes the background components of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the switch  2642 , and the background components of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the switch  2652 , in the frame #n, and supplies to the frame memory  2623 . 
   The frame memory  2623  stores the foreground components and the background components of the pixels in the mixed region in the frame #n, supplied from the separation processing block  2622 , respectively. 
   The frame memory  2623  outputs the foreground components of the pixels in the mixed region in the frame #n stored therein, and the background components of the pixels in the mixed region in the frame #n stored therein. 
   Using the mixture ratio α which is the feature amount enables complete separation of the foreground components and the background components, contained in the pixel value. 
   The synthesizing unit  2603  generates a foreground component image by synthesizing the foreground components of the pixel in the mixed region in the frame #n output from the separation unit  2601 , and the pixels belonging to the foreground region. The synthesizing unit  2605  generates a background component image by synthesizing the background components of the pixels in the mixed region in the frame #n output from the separation unit  2601 , and pixels belonging to the background region. 
     FIG. 130A  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the foreground component image corresponding to the frame #n shown in  FIG. 126 .  FIG. 130B  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the background component image corresponding to the frame #n shown in  FIG. 126 . 
     FIG. 130A  illustrates an example of the foreground component image corresponding to the frame #n shown in  FIG. 126 . Since the left-most pixel and the fourteenth pixel from the left are made up of only the background components before separation of the foreground and the background, the pixel values are 0. 
   The second through fourth pixels from the left belong to the uncovered background region prior to the foreground and the background being separated, with the background components being 0, and the foreground components being left as they are. The eleventh through thirteenth pixels belong to the covered background region before separation of the foreground and the background, and the background components are 0, and the foreground components are left as they are. Since the fifth through tenth pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components, those are left as they are. 
     FIG. 130B  illustrates an example of the background component image corresponding to the frame #n shown in  FIG. 126 . The left-most pixel and the fourteenth pixel from the left are made up of only the background components prior to the foreground and the background being separated, and accordingly, those are left as they are. 
   The second through fourth pixels from the left belong to the uncovered background region prior to the foreground and the background being separated, with the foreground components being 0, and the background components being left as they are. The eleventh through thirteenth pixels belong to the covered background region prior to the foreground and the background being separated, the foreground components being 0, and the background components being left as they are. The fifth through tenth pixels from the left are made up of only the foreground components prior to the foreground and the background being separated, and accordingly the pixel values are 0. 
   The separation processing for the foreground and the background by the foreground/background separation unit  2001  will now be described, with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 131 . In Step S 2601 , the frame memory  2621  of the separation unit  2601  obtains the input image, and stores the frame #n which is the object for separation of the foreground and the background, as well as the previous frame #n−1 and the following frame #n+1. 
   In Step S 2602 , the separation processing block  2622  of the separation unit  2601  obtains the region information supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . In Step S 2603 , the separation processing block  2622  of the separation unit  2601  obtains the mixture ratio α supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  104 . 
   In Step S 2604 , the uncovered region processing unit  2631  extracts the background components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the frame memory  2621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α. 
   In Step S 2605 , the uncovered region processing unit  2631  extracts the foreground components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region supplied from the frame memory  2621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α. 
   In Step S 2606 , the covered region processing unit  2632  extracts the background components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the frame memory  2621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α. 
   In Step S 2607 , the covered region processing unit  2632  extracts the foreground components from the pixel value of the pixel belonging to the covered background region supplied from the frame memory  2621  based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α. 
   In Step S 2608 , the synthesizing unit  2633  synthesizes the foreground components of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region extracted in the processing in Step S 2605 , and the foreground components of the pixel belonging to the covered background region extracted in the processing in Step S 2607 . The synthesized foreground components are supplied to the synthesizing unit  2603 . Moreover, the synthesizing unit  2603  synthesizes the pixels belonging to the foreground region supplied via the switch  2602 , and the foreground components supplied from the separation unit  2601 , and generates a foreground component image. 
   In Step S 2609 , the synthesizing unit  2634  synthesizes the background components of the pixel belonging to the uncovered background region extracted in the processing in Step S 2604 , and the background components of the pixel belonging to the covered background region extracted in the processing in Step S 2606 . The synthesized background components are supplied to the synthesizing unit  2605 . Moreover, the synthesizing unit  2605  synthesizes the pixels belonging to the background region supplied via the switch  2604 , and the background components supplied from the separation unit  2601 , and generates the background component image. 
   In Step S 2610 , the synthesizing unit  2603  outputs the foreground component image. In Step S 2611 , the synthesizing unit  2605  outputs the background component image, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the foreground/background separation unit  2001  can separate the foreground components and the background components from the input image based upon the region information and the mixture ratio α, and output the foreground component image which is made up of only the foreground components, and the background component image which is made up of only the background components. 
   The removal of movement blurring from the foreground component image will now be described. 
     FIG. 132  is a block diagram which illustrates an example of the configuration of the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . The movement vector and the position information thereof supplied from the movement detecting unit  102 , and the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103  are supplied to a processing increment decision unit  2801  and the modeling unit  2802 . The foreground component image supplied from the foreground/background separation unit  2001  is supplied to the addition unit  2804 . 
   The processing increment decision unit  2801  supplies the processing increment generated based upon the movement vector, the position information thereof, and the region information, along with the movement vector, to the modeling unit  2802 . The processing increment decision unit  2801  supplies the generated processing increment to the addition unit  2804 . 
   The processing increment generated by the processing increment decision unit  2801  denoted by A in  FIG. 133 , as illustrated by an example in  FIG. 133 , indicates the pixels arrayed sequentially in a movement direction beginning at the pixel corresponding to the covered background region of the foreground component image up to the pixel corresponding to the uncovered background region, or the pixels arrayed sequentially in a movement direction beginning at the pixel corresponding to the uncovered background region up to the pixel corresponding to the covered background region. The processing increment is made up of, for example, two pieces of data of the upper-left point (the left-most or the top-most position of the pixel, which is the pixel designated by the processing increment) and the bottom-right point. 
   The modeling unit  2802  performs modeling based upon the movement vector and the input processing increment. More specifically, for example, an arrangement may be made wherein the modeling unit  2802  stores the number of pixels included in the processing increment, the virtual dividing number of the pixel value in the time direction, and multiple models corresponding to the number of the foreground components for each pixel beforehand, and selects a model which designates the correspondence of the pixel value to the foreground components as shown in  FIG. 134 , based upon the processing increment and the virtual dividing number of the pixel value in the time direction. 
   For example, in the event that the number of pixels corresponding to the processing increment is 12, and the movement amount v in the shutter period is 5, the modeling unit  2802  sets the virtual dividing number to 5, and selects a model made up of eight foreground components overall, wherein the left-most positioned pixel contains one foreground component, the second pixel from the left contains two foreground components, the third pixel from the left contains three foreground components, the fourth pixel from the left contains four foreground components, the fifth pixel from the left contains five foreground components, the sixth pixel from the left contains five foreground components, the seventh pixel from the left contains five foreground components, the eighth pixel from the left contains five foreground components, the ninth pixel from the left contains four foreground components, the tenth pixel from the left contains three foreground components, the eleventh pixel from the left contains two foreground components, and the twelfth pixel from the left contains one foreground component. 
   Note that an arrangement may be made wherein the modeling unit  2802  does not select a model from the models stored beforehand, but rather generates a model based upon the movement vector and the processing increment in the event that the movement vector and the processing increment are supplied. 
   The modeling unit  2802  supplies the selected model to an expression generating unit  2803 . 
   The expression generating unit  2803  generates a expression based upon a model supplied from the modeling unit  2802 . The expression generated by the expression generating unit  2803  will be described in a case wherein the number of the foreground components is 8, the number of pixels corresponding to the processing increment is 12, the movement amount v is 5, and the virtual dividing number is 5, with reference to the model for the foreground component image shown in  FIG. 134 . 
   In the event that the foreground components corresponding to the shutter period/v contained in the foreground component image are F 01 /v through F 08 /v, the relationships between F 01 /v through F 08 /v and the pixel values C 01  through C 12  are represented in Expression (95) through Expression (106).
 
 C 01= F 01/ v   (95)
 
 C 02= F 02/ v+F 01/ v   (96)
 
 C 03= F 03/ v+F 02/ v+F 01/ v   (97)
 
 C 04= F 04/ v+F 03/ v+F 02/ v+F 01/ v   (98)
 
 C 05= F 05/ v+F 04/ v+F 03/ v+F 02/ v+F 01/ v   (99)
 
 C 06= F 06/ v+F 05/ v+F 04/ v+F 03/ v+F 02/ v   (100)
 
 C 07= F 07/ v+F 06/ v+F 05/ v+F 04/ v+F 03/ v   (101)
 
 C 08= F 08/ v+F 07/ v+F 06/ v+F 05/ v+F 04/ v   (102)
 
 C 09= F 08/ v+F 07/ v+F 06/ v+F 05/ v   (103)
 
 C 10= F 08/ v+F 07/ v+F 06/ v   (104)
 
 C 11= F 08/ v+F 07/ v   (105)
 
 C 12= F 08/ v   (106)
 
   The expression generating unit  2803  generates expressions by transforming the generated expressions. The expressions generated by the expression generating unit  2803  are represented in Expression (107) through Expression (118).
 
 C 01=1 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (107)
 
 C 02=1 ·F 01/ v +1 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (108)
 
 C 03=1 ·F 01/ v +1 ·F 02/ v +1 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (109)
 
 C 04=1 ·F 01/ v +1 ·F 02/ v +1 ·F 03/ v +1 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (110)
 
 C 05=1 ·F 01/ v +1 ·F 02/ v +1 ·F 03/ v +1 ·F 04/ v +1 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (111)
 
 C 06=0 ·F 01/ v +1 ·F 02/ v +1 ·F 03/ v +1 ·F 04/ v +1 ·F 05/ v +1 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (112)
 
 C 07=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +1 ·F 03/ v +1 ·F 04/ v +1 ·F 05/ v +1 ·F 06/ v +1 ·F 07/ v +0 ·F 08/ v   (113)
 
 C 08=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +1 ·F 04/ v +1 ·F 05/ v +1 ·F 06/ v +1 ·F 07/ v +1 ·F 08/ v   (114)
 
 C 09=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +1 ·F 05/ v +1 ·F 06/ v +1 ·F 07/ v +1 ·F 08/ v   (115)
 
 C 10=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +1 ·F 06/ v +1 ·F 07/ v +1 ·F 08/ v   (116)
 
 C 11=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +1 ·F 07/ v +1 ·F 08/ v   (117)
 
 C 12=0 ·F 01/ v +0 ·F 02/ v +0 ·F 03/ v +0 ·F 04/ v +0 ·F 05/ v +0 ·F 06/ v +0 ·F 07/ v +1 ·F 08/ v   (118)
 
   Expression (107) through Expression (118) may be represented as with Expression (119). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   C 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   j 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       i 
                       = 
                       01 
                     
                     08 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     a 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     i 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       j 
                       · 
                       F 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       i 
                       / 
                       v 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 119 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (119), j denotes the pixel position. In this example, j has one of the values between 1 and 12. Also, i denotes the position of the foreground value. In this example, i has one of the values between 1 and 8. Corresponding to the values of i and j, aij has one of the values of 0 or 1. 
   Taking margin of error into consideration, Expression (119) may be represented as with Expression (120). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   C 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   j 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         01 
                       
                       08 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       a 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       i 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         j 
                         · 
                         F 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         i 
                         / 
                         v 
                       
                     
                   
                   + 
                   
                     e 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     j 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 120 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (120), ej denotes the margin of error contained in the pixel of interest, Cj. 
   Expression (120) can be rewritten into Expression (121) 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   e 
                   ⁢ 
                   
                       
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   j 
                 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     C 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     j 
                   
                   - 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         i 
                         = 
                         01 
                       
                       08 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       a 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       i 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         j 
                         · 
                         F 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         i 
                         / 
                         v 
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 121 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Note that in order to use the least square method, the squared-sum of the margin of error E is defined as represented in Expression (122). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 E 
                 = 
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       j 
                       = 
                       01 
                     
                     12 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     e 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       j 
                       2 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 122 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   To minimize margin of error, the value of the partial derivative of the squared-sum of the margin of error E from the variable Fk should become 0. Fk is obtained so as to satisfy Expression (123). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           ∂ 
                           E 
                         
                         
                           
                             ∂ 
                             F 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                               
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           k 
                         
                       
                       = 
                       
                         2 
                         · 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               j 
                               = 
                               01 
                             
                             12 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             e 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               j 
                               · 
                               
                                 
                                   
                                     ∂ 
                                     e 
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   j 
                                 
                                 
                                   
                                     ∂ 
                                     F 
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   
                                       
                                   
                                   ⁢ 
                                   k 
                                 
                               
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 
                   
                     
                       = 
                       
                         2 
                         · 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               j 
                               = 
                               01 
                             
                             12 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             { 
                             
                               
                                 
                                   ( 
                                   
                                     
                                       C 
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                           
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       j 
                                     
                                     - 
                                     
                                       
                                         ∑ 
                                         
                                           i 
                                           = 
                                           01 
                                         
                                         08 
                                       
                                       ⁢ 
                                       
                                         a 
                                         ⁢ 
                                         
                                             
                                         
                                         ⁢ 
                                         i 
                                         ⁢ 
                                         
                                             
                                         
                                         ⁢ 
                                         
                                           j 
                                           · 
                                           F 
                                         
                                         ⁢ 
                                         
                                             
                                         
                                         ⁢ 
                                         
                                           i 
                                           / 
                                           v 
                                         
                                       
                                     
                                   
                                   ) 
                                 
                                 · 
                                 
                                   ( 
                                   
                                     
                                       - 
                                       a 
                                     
                                     ⁢ 
                                     
                                         
                                     
                                     ⁢ 
                                     k 
                                     ⁢ 
                                     
                                         
                                     
                                     ⁢ 
                                     
                                       j 
                                       / 
                                       v 
                                     
                                   
                                   ) 
                                 
                               
                               = 
                               0 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 123 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In Expression (123), the movement amount v is a fixed value, so Expression (124) can be derived. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       j 
                       = 
                       01 
                     
                     12 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     a 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     k 
                     ⁢ 
                     
                         
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       j 
                       · 
                       
                         ( 
                         
                           
                             C 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             j 
                           
                           - 
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 01 
                               
                               08 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               a 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                 j 
                                 · 
                                 F 
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 / 
                                 v 
                               
                             
                           
                         
                         ) 
                       
                     
                   
                 
                 = 
                 0 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 124 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Developing Expression (124) and transposing arguments, Expression (125) is obtained. 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     ∑ 
                     
                       j 
                       = 
                       01 
                     
                     12 
                   
                   ⁢ 
                   
                     ( 
                     
                       a 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       k 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         j 
                         · 
                         
                           
                             ∑ 
                             
                               i 
                               = 
                               01 
                             
                             08 
                           
                           ⁢ 
                           
                             a 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             i 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               j 
                               · 
                               F 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             i 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ) 
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   v 
                   · 
                   
                     
                       ∑ 
                       
                         j 
                         = 
                         01 
                       
                       12 
                     
                     ⁢ 
                     
                       a 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       k 
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                         j 
                         · 
                         C 
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       
                           
                       
                       ⁢ 
                       j 
                     
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 125 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   Expression (125) is developed into eight expressions, each of which is obtained by substituting one of the integers between 1 and 8 for k in Expression (125). The obtained eight expressions may be represented in one expression by a matrix. The expression is referred to as a normal equation. 
   An example of the normal equation generated by the expression generating unit  2803  based upon such the least square method is represented in Expression (126). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           5 
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                   ⁡ 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             01 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             02 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             03 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             04 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             05 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             06 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             07 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             08 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   v 
                   · 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 08 
                               
                               12 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 07 
                               
                               11 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 06 
                               
                               10 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 05 
                               
                               09 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 04 
                               
                               08 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 03 
                               
                               07 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 02 
                               
                               06 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 01 
                               
                               05 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 126 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   In the event that Expression (126) is represented by A F=v·C, then C, A, and v are known, and F is unknown. Also, while A and v are known at the point of modeling, C becomes known by inputting the pixel value in addition operation. 
   The margin of error contained in the pixel C is dispersed by calculating the foreground components by the normal equation based upon the least square method. 
   The expression generating unit  2803  supplies the normal equation generated as described above, to the addition unit  2804 . 
   The addition unit  2804  sets the pixel value C contained in the foreground component image for the expression of the matrix supplied from the expression generating unit  2803  based upon the processing increment supplied from the processing increment decision unit  2801 . The addition unit  2804  supplies the matrix which the pixel value C is set for, to the computing unit  2805 . 
   The computing unit  2805  calculates the foreground component Fi/v which has been subjected to removal of the movement blurring by the processing based upon the method such as the sweeping method (Gauss-Jordan elimination), calculates Fi corresponding to one of the integers i between 0 and 8, which is the pixel value of the foreground which has been subjected to removal of the movement blurring, and outputs the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of the movement blurring, which is made up of Fi which is the pixel value which has been subjected to removal of the movement blurring as shown by way of an example, shown in  FIG. 135 . 
   Note that in the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of the movement blurring shown in  FIG. 135 , each of C 03  through C 10  is set to each of F 01  through F 08  so as not to change the position of the foreground component image with regard to the screen, which can correspond to an arbitrary position. 
   Also, as shown in  FIG. 136 , for example, in the event that the number of pixel corresponding to the processing increment is 8 and the movement amount v is 4, the movement blurring removal unit  2002  generates a matrix expression represented in Expression (127). 
   
     
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           0 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           0 
                         
                         
                           1 
                         
                         
                           2 
                         
                         
                           3 
                         
                         
                           4 
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                   ⁡ 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             01 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             02 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             03 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             04 
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             F 
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             05 
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                 
                 = 
                 
                   v 
                   · 
                   
                     [ 
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 05 
                               
                               08 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 04 
                               
                               07 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 03 
                               
                               06 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 02 
                               
                               05 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                       
                         
                           
                             
                               ∑ 
                               
                                 i 
                                 = 
                                 01 
                               
                               04 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                                 
                             
                             ⁢ 
                             
                               C 
                               ⁢ 
                               
                                   
                               
                               ⁢ 
                               i 
                             
                           
                         
                       
                     
                     ] 
                   
                 
               
             
             
               
                 ( 
                 127 
                 ) 
               
             
           
         
       
     
   
   The movement blurring removal unit  2002  calculates Fi which is the pixel value which has been subjected to adjustment of movement blurring by forming expressions of which number corresponds to the length of the processing increment. In the same way, in the event that the number of pixel contained in the processing increment is one hundred, Fi is calculated by generating expressions corresponding to the one hundred pixels. 
   As described above, the movement blurring removal unit  2002  generates expressions corresponding to the movement amount v and the processing increment, sets pixel values of the foreground component image for the generated expressions, and calculates an foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring. 
   The processing for removal of movement blurring contained in the foreground component image by the movement blurring removal unit  2002  will now be descried with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 137 . 
   In Step S 2801 , the processing increment decision unit  2801  of the movement blurring removal unit  2002  generates the processing increment based upon the movement vector and the region information, and supplies the generated processing increment to the modeling unit  2802 . 
   In Step S 2802 , the modeling unit  2802  of the movement blurring removal unit  2002  performs selecting or generating of the model corresponding to the movement amount v and the processing increment. In Step S 2803 , the expression generating unit  2803  creates the normal equation based upon the selected model. 
   In Step S 2804 , the addition unit  2804  sets the pixel values of the foreground component image for the created normal equation. In Step S 2805 , the addition unit  2804  judges whether or not the pixel values of all the pixels corresponding to the processing increment are set, and in the event that judgment is made that not all the pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the processing increment have been set, the flow returns to Step S 2804  and repeats the processing of setting the pixel values for the normal equation. 
   In the event that judgment is made that all the pixel values of the pixels of the processing increment have been set in Step S 2805 , the flow proceeds to Step S 2806 , the computing unit  2805  calculates the pixel values of the foreground which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring based upon the normal equation wherein the pixel values supplied from the addition unit  2804  are set, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the movement blurring removal unit  2002  can remove movement blurring from the foreground image containing the movement blurring based upon the movement vector and the region information. 
   That is to say, movement blurring contained in the pixel values which are the sampled data, can be removed. 
   Next, correction of the background component image will be described. 
     FIG. 138  is a diagram which illustrates an example of the model of the background component image corresponding to the model of the foreground component image shown by way of an example shown in  FIG. 134 . 
   As shown in  FIG. 138 , the foreground components have been removed, so pixel values of the pixels of the background component image corresponding to the mixed region in the original input image are made up of a small number of background components as compared with the pixels corresponding to the background region in the original input image, corresponding to the mixture ratio α. 
   For example, in the background component image shown by way of an example shown in  FIG. 138 , the pixel value C 01  is made up of four background components B 02 /Vs, the pixel value C 02  is made up of three background components B 03 /Vs, the pixel value C 03  is made up of two background components B 04 /Vs, and the pixel value C 04  is made up of one background component B 05 /V. 
   Also, with the background component image shown by way of an example shown in  FIG. 138 , the pixel value C 09  is made up of one background component B 10 /V, the pixel value C 10  is made up of two background components B 11 /Vs, the pixel value C 11  is made up of three background components B 12 /Vs, and the pixel value C 12  is made up of four background components B 13 /Vs. 
   As described above, the pixel value of a pixel corresponding to the mixed region in the original input image is made up of a small number of background components as compared with the pixel corresponding to the background region in the original input image, and accordingly the image corresponding to the mixed region in the foreground component image becomes a dark image, for example, as compared with the image of the background region. 
   The correction unit  2003  corrects pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image by multiplying each of pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image by a constant corresponding to the mixture ratio α. 
   For example, in the event that the background component image shown in  FIG. 138  is input, the correction unit  2003  multiplies the pixel value C 01  by 5/4, multiplies the pixel value C 02  by 5/3, multiplies the pixel value C 11  by 5/3, and multiplies the pixel value C 12  by 5/4. In order to match with the pixel position of the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring shown by way of an example shown in  FIG. 135 , the correction unit  2003  sets the pixel value C 03  through pixel value C 11  to 0. 
   As described above, the correction unit  2003  corrects pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image, and also adjusts the pixel position with regard to the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring. 
     FIG. 140  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  for generating a coefficient set which is used in class classification adaptation processing for generating an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction. For example, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 140  generates a coefficient set which is used in class classification adaptation processing for generating a HD image from a SD image based upon the input HD image. 
   Background component tutor image frame memory  3001  stores the corrected background component image of the tutor image supplied from the correction unit  2003 . The background component tutor image frame memory  3001  supplies the stored background component image of the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  and a learning unit  3006 - 1 . 
   Foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002  stores the foreground component image of the tutor image, which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, supplied from the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . The foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002  supplies the stored foreground component image of the tutor image to a weighted averaging unit  3003 - 2  and a learning unit  3006 - 2 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  generates a SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the background component image of a tutor image which is a HD image, and supplies the generated SD image to background component student image frame memory  3004 . 
   For example, the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  takes four pixels of 2×2 (width×height) (portions represented by white circles in the drawing) as one increment in the tutor image as shown in  FIG. 85 , adds pixel values of four pixel of each increment, and the sum is divided by 4. The weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  sets the ¼ weighted averaged results described above for the pixel of the student image positioned at the center of each increment (which are the portions represented by solid circles in the drawing). 
   The background component student image frame memory  3004  stores the student image corresponding to the background component image of the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1 . The background component student image frame memory  3004  supplies the student image corresponding to the background component image of the tutor image stored therein to the learning unit  3006 - 1 . 
   The weighted averaging unit  3003 - 2  generates a SD image which is a student image by ¼ weighted-averaging the foreground component image of a tutor image which is a HD image supplied from the foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002 , for example, and supplies the generated SD image to foreground component student image frame memory  3005 . 
   The foreground component student image frame memory  3005  stores the student image which is a SD image, corresponding to the foreground component image of the tutor image supplied from the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 2 . The foreground component student image frame memory  3005  supplies the student image corresponding to the foreground component image of the tutor image stored therein to the learning unit  3006 - 2 . 
   The learning unit  3006 - 1  generates coefficient sets corresponding to the background component image based upon the background component image of the tutor image supplied from the background component tutor image frame memory  3001  and the student image corresponding to the background component image of the tutor image supplied from the background component student image frame memory  3004 , and supplies the generated coefficient sets to coefficient set memory  3007 . 
   The learning unit  3006 - 2  generates coefficient sets corresponding to the foreground component image based upon the foreground component image of the tutor image supplied from the foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image of the tutor image supplied from the foreground component student image frame memory  3005 , and supplies the generated coefficient sets to coefficient set memory  3007 . 
   The coefficient set memory  3007  stores the coefficient sets corresponding to the background component image supplied from the learning unit  3006 - 1  and the foreground component image supplied from the learning unit  3006 - 2 . 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate the learning unit  3006 - 1  and the learning unit  3006 - 2  individually, these will be simply referred to as a learning unit  3006  below. 
     FIG. 141  is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the learning unit  3006 . 
   The class classification unit  3031  is configured of a class tap obtaining unit  3051  and a waveform classification unit  3052 , and performs class classification of the pixels of interest, which are the pixels at interest, in the input student image. The class tap obtaining unit  3051  obtains a predetermined number of class taps which are pixels in the student image corresponding to the pixel of interest, and supply the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  3052 . 
   The waveform classification unit  3052  executes class classification processing for classifying input signals into several classes based on the characteristics thereof, and classify the pixel of interest into one class of the 512 classes, based on the class tap, and supplies class Nos. corresponding to the classes into which classification has been made, to a prediction tap obtaining unit  3032 . 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  3032  obtains from the pixels of the student image a prediction tap which is an increment for calculating predicted values for the original image (tutor image) corresponding to the class, based on the class No., and supplies the obtained prediction tap and class No. to a corresponding pixel obtaining unit  3033 . 
   The corresponding pixel obtaining unit  3033  obtains the pixel value of the pixel in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel value to be predicted, based on the prediction tap and the class No., and supplies the prediction tap, class No., and pixel value of the pixel in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel value to be predicted, to a normal equation generating unit  3034 . 
   The normal equation generating unit  3034  generates a normal equation for calculating a coefficient set used in adaptation processing, corresponding to the relation between the prediction tap and the pixel value to be predicted, based on the prediction tap, class No., and pixel value of the pixel in the tutor image corresponding to the pixel value to be predicted, and supplies the generated normal equation to a coefficient calculation unit  3035 , along with the class No. 
   The coefficient calculation unit  3035  solves the normal equation supplied from the normal equation generating unit  3034 , and calculates a coefficient set to be used in the adaptation processing, corresponding to the class into which classification has been made. 
   The coefficient calculation unit  3035  supplies the calculated coefficient set to coefficient set memory  7025 , along with the class No. 
   An arrangement may be made wherein the normal equation generating unit  3034  generates a matrix corresponding to such a normal equation, and the coefficient calculation unit  3035  calculates the coefficient set, based on the generated matrix. 
     FIG. 142  is a diagram which describes a coefficient set generated by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 140 . The region specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, the background region, the covered background region, and the uncovered background region in the input image. 
   The input image, wherein the regions have been specified and the mixture ratio α has been detected by the mixture ratio calculation unit  104 , is separated into the foreground component image and the background component image by the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
   The movement blurring is removed from the separated foreground component image by the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . The pixel values corresponding to the mixed region in the separated background component image are corrected by the correction unit  2003  corresponding to the removal of the movement blurring of the foreground component image. 
   The movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image and a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image, respectively, based upon the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring and the background component image which has been subjected to correction. 
   That is to say, the learning unit  3006 - 1  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image based upon the separated and corrected background component image, and the learning unit  3006 - 2  calculates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image based upon the foreground component image which has been subjected to separation and removal of movement blurring. 
   The coefficient set corresponding to the background component image is used for predicting the pixel values of the image corresponding to the background component image in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting the pixel values, which is to be applied to the separated and corrected background component image. 
   The coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image is used for predicting the pixel values of the image corresponding to the foreground component image in the class classification adaptation processing for predicting the pixel values, which is to be applied to the foreground component image which has been subjected to separation and removal of movement blurring. 
   The movement blurring is added to the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image. The predicted image corresponding to the background component image is corrected corresponding to addition of the movement blurring to the foreground component image. 
   The predicted image corresponding to the corrected background component image and the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image which has been subjected to addition of the movement blurring, are synthesized into a single predicted image. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 143 , description will be made with regard to the processing of learning for generating a coefficient set which is used in prediction of the pixel values by the class classification adaptation processing in the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 140 . 
   In Step S 3001 , the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  and the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 2  generate a student image corresponding to the background component image and a student image corresponding to the foreground component image. That is to say, the weighted averaging unit  3003 - 1  generates a student image corresponding to the background component image of the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the background component image of the tutor image stored in the background component tutor image frame memory  3001 , for example. 
   The weighted averaging unit  3003 - 2  generates a student image corresponding to the foreground component image of the tutor image by ¼ weighted-averaging of the foreground component image of the tutor image stored in the foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002 , for example. 
   In Step S 3002 , the learning unit  3006 - 1  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image based upon the background component image of the tutor image stored in the background component tutor image frame memory  3001  and the student image corresponding to the background component image of the tutor image stored in the background component student image frame memory  3004 . Details of the processing for generating of a coefficient set in Step S 3002  will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 144 . 
   In Step S 3003 , the learning unit  3006 - 2  generates a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image based upon the foreground component image of the tutor image stored in the foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image of the tutor image stored in the foreground component student image frame memory  3005 . 
   In Step S 3004 , the learning unit  3006 - 1  and the learning unit  3006 - 2  output a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image and a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image to the coefficient set memory  3007 , respectively. The coefficient set memory  3007  stores the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image, or the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image, and then the processing ends. 
   As described above, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 140  can generate a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image and a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 3002  and Step S 3003  may be performed serially or in parallel. 
   Next, referring to  FIG. 144 , the processing for generating a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image performed by the learning unit  3006 - 1 , corresponding to Step S 3002 , will now be described. 
   In Step S 3021 , the learning unit  3006 - 1  judges whether or not there are any unprocessed pixels in the student image corresponding to the background component image, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the student image corresponding to the background component image, the flow proceeds to Step S 3022 , and the pixel of interest is obtained from the student image corresponding to the background component image in raster scan sequence. 
   In Step S 3023 , the class tap obtaining unit  3051  of the class tap classification unit  3031  obtains a class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the student image stored in the background component student image frame memory  3004 . In Step S 3024 , the waveform classification unit  3052  of the class classification unit  3031  applies the ADRC processing to the class tap, this reduces the number of bits of pixels making up the class tap, and the pixel of interest is classified. In Step S 3025 , the prediction tap obtaining unit  3032  obtains a prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the student image stored in the background component student image frame memory  3004  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 3026 , the corresponding pixel obtaining unit  3033  obtains pixels corresponding to the pixel value which is to be predicted from the background component image of the tutor image stored in the background component tutor image frame memory  3001  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 3027 , the normal equation generating unit  3034  adds the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted to the matrix for each class based upon the classified class, the flow returns to Step S 3021 , and the learning unit  3006 - 1  repeats judgment whether or not unprocessed pixels exist. The matrix for each class to which the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted is added, corresponds to the normal equations for calculating a coefficient set for each class. 
   In Step S 3021 , in the event that judgment is made that there are no unprocessed pixels in the student image, the flow proceeds to Step S 3028 , and the normal equation generating unit  3034  supplies the matrix for each class for which the pixel values of the pixel corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted is set, to the coefficient calculation unit  3035 . The coefficient calculation unit  3035  calculates a coefficient set for each class corresponding to the background component image by solving the matrix for each class, wherein the pixel values of pixels corresponding to the prediction tap and the pixel value which is to be predicted are set. 
   Note that the coefficient set is not restricted to predicting the pixel values by linear prediction, rather, an arrangement may be made wherein the coefficient calculation unit  3035  calculates a coefficient set for predicting the pixel values by non-linear prediction. 
   In Step S 3029 , the coefficient calculation unit  3035  outputs the coefficient set for each class, corresponding to the background component image to the coefficient set memory  3007 , and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the learning unit  3006 - 1  can generate the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image. 
   The processing for generating of the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image by the learning unit  3006 - 2  corresponding to Step S 3003  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 144  except for using the foreground component image stored in the foreground component tutor image frame memory  3002  and the student image corresponding to the foreground component image stored in the foreground component student image frame memory  105 , and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   As described above, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 140  can generate a coefficient set corresponding to the background component image which has been subjected to correction and a coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image which has been removal of movement blurring individually. 
     FIG. 145  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  for generating an even higher resolution image in the spatial direction by performing the class classification adaptation processing. For example, the movement blurring removal processing unit  2004  of which the configuration is shown in  FIG. 145  generates an HD image by performing the class classification adaptation processing based upon the input image which is a SD image. 
   Background component image frame memory  3101  stores the background component image which has been subjected to correction supplied from the correction unit  2003 . The background component image frame memory  3101  supplies the stored background component image to a mapping unit  3103 - 1 . 
   Foreground component image frame memory  3102  stores the foreground component image made up of pixels belonging to the foreground region, supplied from the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . The foreground component image frame memory  3102  supplies the stored foreground component image to a mapping unit  3103 - 2 . 
   The mapping unit  3103 - 1  generates a predicted image corresponding to the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3101  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image stored in the coefficient set memory  3104 . The mapping unit  3103 - 1  supplies the generated predicted image to a correction unit  3105 . 
   The correction unit  3105  sets the pixel value of the predetermined pixel in the predicted image corresponding to the mixed region in the background component image corresponding to the movement blurring, which the movement blurring addition unit  3106  adds, to 0; or divides the pixel value of the predetermined pixel in the predicted image by the predetermined value corresponding to the movement blurring which is added. The correction unit  3105  supplies the predicted image which has been subjected to correction described above to a synthesizing unit  3107 . 
   The mapping unit  3103 - 2  generates a predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image stored in the foreground component image frame memory  3102  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image stored in the coefficient set memory  3104 . The mapping unit  3103 - 2  supplies the generated predicted image to the movement blurring addition unit  3106 . 
   The movement blurring addition unit  3106  adds movement blurring to the predicted image by providing the desired movement blurring adjustment amount v′, e.g., the movement blurring adjustment amount v′ of which value is the half value of the movement amount v of the input image or the movement blurring adjustment amount v′ having no relationship with the movement amount v. The movement blurring addition unit  3106  calculates the foreground component Fi/v′ by dividing the pixel value Fi in the predicted image in the foreground component image which has subjected to removal of movement blurring by the movement blurring adjustment amount v′, calculates the sum of the foreground components Fi/v&#39;s, and generates the pixel value which movement blurring is added to. 
   For example, in the event that the predicted image shown in  FIG. 146  is input, and the movement blurring adjustment amount v′ is 3, the pixel value C 02  is (F 01 )/v′, the pixel value C 03  is (F 01 +F 02 )/v′, the pixel value C 04  is (F 01 +F 02 +F 03 )/v′, and the pixel value C 05  is (F 02 +F 03 +F 04 )/v′ as shown in  FIG. 147 . 
   The movement blurring addition unit  3106  supplies the predicted image of the foreground component image which has been subjected to addition of movement blurring, to the synthesizing unit  3107 . 
   The synthesizing unit  3107  synthesizes the predicted image corresponding to the background component image which has been subjected to correction supplied from the correction unit  3105 , and the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image which has been subjected to addition of movement blurring supplied from the movement blurring addition unit  3106 , and supplies synthesized predicted image to the frame memory  3108 . 
   The frame memory  3108  stores the predicted image supplied from the synthesizing unit  3107 , and also outputs the stored image as an output image. 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate the mapping unit  3103 - 1  and the mapping unit  3103 - 2  individually, these will be simply referred to as the mapping unit  3103  below. 
     FIG. 148  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the mapping unit  3103 . 
   The mapping unit  3131  comprises a class classification unit  3141  for performing class classification processing, and a prediction tap obtaining unit  3142  and a prediction computation unit  3143  for performing the adaptation processing. 
   The class classification unit  3141  comprises a class tap obtaining unit  3151  and a waveform classification unit  3152 , and performs class classification for pixel of interest in the input image of either background component image or foreground component image. 
   The class tap obtaining unit  3151  obtains a predetermined number of class taps corresponding to pixel of interest in the input image, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  3152 . For example, the class tap obtaining unit  3151  obtains nine class taps, and supplies the obtained class taps to the waveform classification unit  3152 . 
   The waveform classification unit  3152  reduces the number of bits of the pixels making up the class taps by applying the ADRC processing to the class taps, classifies the pixel of interest into one of the predetermined number of classes, and supplies the class No. corresponding to the classified class to the prediction tap obtaining unit  3142 . For example, the waveform classification unit  3152  classifies the pixel of interest to one of 512 classes, and supplies the class No. corresponding to the classified class to the prediction tap obtaining unit  3142 . 
   The prediction tap obtaining unit  3142  obtains the predetermined number of prediction taps corresponding to the class from the input image based upon the class No., and supplies the obtained prediction taps and class No. to the prediction computation unit  3143 . 
   The prediction computation unit  3143  obtains the coefficient set corresponding to the class, and corresponding to the input image, from the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image and coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image, stored in the coefficient set memory  3104  based upon the class No. The prediction computation unit  3143  predicts a pixel value in the predicted image by linear prediction based upon the coefficient set and the prediction taps corresponding to the class, and corresponding to the input image. The prediction computation unit  3143  supplies the predicted pixel value to the frame memory  3132 . 
   Note that an arrangement may be made wherein the prediction computation unit  3143  predicts the pixel value in the predicted image by non-linear prediction. 
   The frame memory  3132  stores the predicted pixel values supplied from the mapping processing unit  3131 , and outputs the image made up of the predicted pixel values. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 149 , the processing for creation of the image by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 149  will be now described. 
   In Step S 3101 , the mapping unit  3103 - 1  predicts the image corresponding to the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3101  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image stored in the coefficient set memory  3104 . Details of the processing for prediction of the image corresponding to the background component image will be described later with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 150 . 
   In Step S 3102 , the mapping unit  3103 - 2  predicts the image corresponding to the foreground component image stored in the foreground component image frame memory  3102  by the class classification adaptation processing based upon the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image stored in the coefficient set memory  3104 . 
   In Step S 3103 , the correction unit  3105  corrects the predicted image corresponding to the background component image. 
   In Step S 3104 , the movement blurring addition unit  3106  adds movement blurring to the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image. 
   In Step S 3105 , the synthesizing unit  3107  synthesizes the predicted image corresponding to the background component image with the predicted image corresponding to the foreground region. The synthesizing unit  3107  supplies the synthesized image to the frame memory  3108 . The frame memory  3108  stores the image supplied from the synthesizing unit  3107 . 
   In Step S 3106 , the frame memory  3108  outputs the stored and synthesized image, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the image processing device having the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 145  generates a predicted image corresponding to the background component image and a predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring individually. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 3101  and the processing in Step S 3102  may be performed in a serial manner, as well as in a parallel manner. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 150 , the processing for prediction of the image corresponding to the background component image by the mapping unit  3103 - 1  corresponding to Step S 3101  will be described. 
   In Step S 3121 , the mapping unit  3103 - 1  judges whether or not there are any unprocessed pixels in the background component image, and in the event that judgment is made that there are unprocessed pixels in the background component image, the flow proceeds to Step S 3122 , and the mapping processing unit  3131  obtains the coefficient set corresponding to the background component image stored in the coefficient set memory  3104 . In Step S 3123 , the mapping processing unit  3131  obtains a pixel of interest from the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3101  in raster scan sequence. 
   In Step S 3124 , the class tap obtaining unit  3151  of the class classification unit  3141  obtains the class tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3101 . In Step S 3125 , the waveform classification unit  3152  of the class classification unit  3141  reduces the number of bits of pixels making up the class tap by applying the ADRC processing to the class tap, and performs class classification for the pixel of interest. In Step S 3126 , the predication tap obtaining unit  3142  obtains the prediction tap corresponding to the pixel of interest from the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3101  based upon the classified class. 
   In Step S 3127 , the prediction computation unit  3143  predicts pixel values of predicted image by linear prediction based upon the coefficient set and the prediction tap, corresponding to the background component image and the classified class. 
   Note that the prediction computation unit  3143  may predict the pixel values of the predicted image by non-linear prediction, as well as to by linear prediction. 
   In Step S 3128 , the prediction computation unit  3143  outputs the predicted pixel value to the frame memory  3132 . The frame memory  3132  stores the pixel value supplied from the prediction computation unit  3143 . The procedure returns to Step S 3121 , and judgment whether or not any unprocessed pixels exist is repeated. 
   In Step S 3121 , in the event that judgment is made that there is no unprocessed pixel in the background component image, the flow proceeds to Step S 3129 , the frame memory  3132  outputs the stored predicted image corresponding to the background component image, and processing ends. 
   As described above, the mapping unit  3103 - 1  can predict the image corresponding to the background component image based upon the corrected background component image. 
   The processing for generating of the predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image by the mapping unit  3103 - 2  corresponding to Step S 3102  is the same as the processing described with reference to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 150  except for using the foreground component image stored in the foreground component image frame memory  3102  and the coefficient set corresponding to the foreground component image, and accordingly, description thereof will be omitted. 
   As described above, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 145  can generate a predicted image corresponding to the background component image and a predicted image corresponding to the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring individually. 
     FIG. 151  is a block diagram which illustrates the configuration of the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  for applying edge enhancement processing with different effects for each background component image, or each foreground component image. 
   Background component image frame memory  3201  stores the corrected background component image supplied from the correction unit  2003 . The background component image frame memory  3201  supplies the stored background component image to an edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1 . 
   Foreground component image frame memory  3202  stores the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, supplied from the movement blurring removal unit  2002 . The foreground component image frame memory  3202  supplies the stored foreground component image to an edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2 . 
   The edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  applies the processing of edge enhancement suitable for the background component image to the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3201 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  performs the processing of edge enhancement which further enhances the edge for the background component image which is a still image as compared with the foreground component image. Thus the sense-of-resolution of the background component image can be improved without unnatural degradation of the image occurring in the event of applying the processing of edge enhancement to images containing noise. 
   The edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  supplies the background component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to a correction unit  3204 . 
   The correction unit  3204  sets the pixel value of pixel in the mixed region in the background component image to 0, or divides the pixel value of the pixel in the mixed region by the predetermined value corresponding to the movement blurring which is to be added, corresponding to the movement blurring added by a movement blurring addition unit  3205 . The correction unit  3204  supplies the image corrected as described above, to a synthesizing unit  3206 . 
   The edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  applies the processing of edge enhancement suitable for the foreground component image, to the foreground component image stored in the foreground component image frame memory  3202 . 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  compares the foreground component image with the background component image, and performs the processing of edge enhancement of which degree is less than that for the background component image. Thus the unnatural degradation in the image can be reduced as well as improving the sense-of-resolution in the foreground component image even if the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring contains noise. 
   The edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  supplies the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement to the movement blurring addition unit  3205 . 
   The movement blurring addition unit  3205  adds movement blurring to the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement, and supplies the foreground component image which has been subjected to addition of movement blurring to a synthesizing unit  3206 . 
   The synthesizing unit  3206  synthesizes the background component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and correction, supplied from the correction unit  3204 , with the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and addition of movement blurring, supplied from the movement blurring addition unit  3205 , and supplies the synthesized predicted image to frame memory  3207 . 
   The frame memory  3207  stores the synthesized predicted image supplied from the synthesizing unit  3206 , and also outputs the stored image as an output image. 
   As described above, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 151  applies the edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of each image, for each background component image or each foreground component image, and accordingly the sense-of-resolution of the image is improved without degrading the image unnaturally. 
   In the event that there is no need to differentiate the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  and the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  individually, these will be referred to as the edge enhancing unit  3203  below. 
   For example, the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  has the same configuration as the edge enhancing unit  907 , and applies edge enhancement processing with a greater degree of edge enhancement to the background component image. The edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  has the same configuration as the edge enhancing unit  907 , and applies edge enhancement processing with a relatively weaker degree of edge enhancement to the foreground component image. 
   As described above, the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  and the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  applies the edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the foreground component image or the background component image, to each foreground component image or each background component image, based upon the different filter coefficients or the gain adjustment coefficients, for example. 
     FIG. 152  is a diagram which describes the processing in the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 151 . 
   The specifying unit  103  specifies the foreground region, uncovered background region, covered background region, and background region in the input image. The input image of which regions are specified, is separated into the background component image and foreground component image by the foreground/background separation unit  2001 . 
   The movement blurring removal unit  2002  removes movement blurring from the separated foreground component image. The correction unit  2003  corrects pixel values of the pixels corresponding to the mixed region in the separated background component image. 
   The movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 151  performs edge enhancement for each of the corrected background component image and the foreground component image which has been subjected to removal of movement blurring, corresponding to the nature of each image. 
   The background component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement is corrected, corresponding to addition of the movement blurring to the foreground component image. The desired movement blurring is added to the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement. 
   The background component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and correction, and the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and addition of movement blurring, are synthesized. 
   Referring to the flowchart shown in  FIG. 153 , the processing for edge enhancement by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 151  will be now described. 
   In Step S 3201 , the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 1  performs edge enhancement for the background component image stored in the background component image frame memory  3201  by edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the background component image. 
   In Step S 3202 , the edge enhancing unit  3203 - 2  performs edge enhancement for the foreground component image stored in the foreground component image frame memory  3202  by the edge enhancement processing corresponding to the nature of the foreground component image. 
   In Step S 3203 , the correction unit  3204  corrects pixel values of pixels in the background component image corresponding to addition of the movement blurring to the foreground component image. 
   In Step S 3204 , the movement blurring addition unit  3205  adds the desired movement blurring to the foreground component image. 
   In Step S 3205 , the synthesizing unit  3206  synthesizes the background component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and correction, with the foreground component image which has been subjected to edge enhancement and addition of movement blurring. The synthesizing unit  3206  supplies the synthesized image to the frame memory  3207 . The frame memory  3207  stores the image supplied from the synthesizing unit  3206 . 
   In Step S 3206 , the frame memory  3207  outputs the stored and synthesized image, and the processing ends. 
   As described above, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 151  can perform the edge enhancement processing for each background component image and each foreground component image corresponding to the nature of each, and accordingly the sense-of-resolution can be improved without unnatural degradation in the image occurring. 
   Note that it is needless to say that the processing in Step S 3201  and Step S 3202  may be performed serially or in parallel. 
   Also, the processing which the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  executes is not restricted to generating coefficients corresponding to SD images and HD images, or generating HD images from SD images, and may be arranged to generate coefficients for generating images with higher resolution in the spatial direction, and generate images with higher resolution in the spatial direction, for example. Further, the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  may execute processing for generating images with higher resolution in the time direction. 
   Note that the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  is not restricted to class classification adaptation processing or edge enhancement processing, and may be arranged to execute other processing, such as, for example, conversion to an image size of a desired size, extracting color signals such as RGB, removing noise, compressing images, encoding, and so forth, for each image of specified regions. For example, the compression ratio can be increased with little deterioration of the image over conventional arrangements by the movement-blurring-removed-image processing unit  2004  compressing images of each of the regions with low compression ratio in directions following movement vectors and high compression ratio in directions orthogonal to movement vectors, based on movement vectors corresponding to images of each of the regions. 
   Also, an arrangement may be made wherein, in the event that the background object is moving, the image processing device removes the movement blurring contained in the background component image, so as to execute processing on a background component image from which movement blurring has been removed. 
     FIG. 154  is a block diagram illustrating another configuration of the functions of the image processing device for separating an input image and processing each separated image. While the image processing device shown in  FIG. 119  performs region specification and calculation of the mixture ratio α serially, the image processing device shown in  FIG. 154  performs region specification and calculation of the mixture ratio α in parallel. 
   Portions which are the same as the function in the block diagram shown in  FIG. 119  are denoted with the same numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   The input image is supplied to the object extracting unit  101 , region specifying unit  103 , mixture ratio calculating unit  1101 , and foreground/background separation unit  3501 . 
   Based on an input image, the mixture ratio calculating unit  1101  calculates an estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein a pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region, and an estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, for each of the pixels contained in the input image, and supplies the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region and the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, thus calculated, to the foreground/background separation unit  3501 . 
     FIG. 155  is a block diagram which illustrates one example of the configuration of the foreground/background separation unit  3501 . 
   The same portions as the movement blurring removal unit  2002  shown in  FIG. 124  are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. 
   A selecting unit  3521  selects one or the other of the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the covered background region and the estimated mixture ratio in a case wherein the pixel is assumed to belong to the uncovered background region, supplied from the mixture ratio calculating unit  1101 , based on the region information supplied from the region specifying unit  103 , and supplies the selected estimated mixture ratio to the separating unit  2601  as mixture ratio α. 
   The separation unit  2601  extracts the foreground components and the background components from the pixel values of the pixels belonging to the mixed region based upon the mixture ratio α supplied from the selection unit  3521  and the region information, and separates into the background components in the uncovered background region, the foreground components in the uncovered background region, the background components in the covered background region, and the foreground components in the covered background region. 
   The configuration of the separation unit  2601  may be the same as the configuration shown in  FIG. 129 . 
   As described above, the image processing device of which configuration is shown in  FIG. 154  can perform processing for each background component image and each foreground component image, corresponding to the nature of each image. 
   As described above, with the image processing device according to the present invention, an input image is separated into a background component image and a foreground component image, and processing suitable for the separated images is executed, so images with higher resolution can be generated without generating unnatural images, for example. 
   Note that while the movement of the object which is the foreground has been described as being from the left to the right, it is needless to say that this is not restricted to that direction. 
   In the above, an example has been given of a case of projecting images in real space having three-dimensional space and time-axis information onto time-space having two-dimensional space and time-axis information, using a video camera, but the present invention is not restricted to this example, and may be applied to cases of projecting a greater amount of first information of a first dimension onto less second information of a second dimension. 
   Note that the sensor is not restricted to a CCD, and may be a sensor which is a solid-state image-taking device, e.g., a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (complementary metal oxide film semiconductor)), BBD (Bucket Brigade Device), CID (Charge Injection Device), or CPD (Charge Priming Device) or the like, and is not restricted to a sensor wherein detecting elements are arrayed in a matrix fashion, but may rather be a sensor wherein the detecting elements are arrayed in a row. 
   The recording medium storing the program for executing the signal processing of the present invention is not only configured of packaged media such as a magnetic disk  91  (including Floppy (Registered Trademark) disks), optical disk  92  (including CD-ROMs (Compact Disc-Read Only Memory), DVDs (Digital Versatile Disc)), magneto-optical disk  93  (including MDs (Mini-Disc) (Registered Trademark)), or semiconductor memory  94  or the like, storing the program, to be distributed separately from the computer as shown in  FIG. 10  for providing the program to users, but is configured of ROM  72  or a hard disk included in the storage unit  78  or the like storing the program, provided to the user in the state of being assembled into the computer beforehand. 
   Also, in the present Specification, the steps describing the program recorded in the recording medium includes processing which is executed in the time-sequence following the described order, of course, and also processing which is executed in parallel or individually, even if not processed in time-sequence. 
   INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY 
   According to the present invention, images can be processed corresponding to the mixing of background images and images of moving objects.